Home

CTC100 manual - Stanford Research Systems

1. 20 9 15 o a amp 10 oO o E 5 75 9 g 70 u 5 P 2W C 65 P 1W C 2 P 0 5W C P 0 25 W C 0 1 2 3 4 5 Minutes Interestingly decreasing the proportional gain to 0 5 or 0 25 W C also results in more overshoot and can even cause oscillations despite the fact that the temperature rises more slowly By reducing the proportional feedback response we ve forced the integral feedback to take more responsibility for raising the heater power and as the next figure illustrates the integral feedback has a greater tendency to overshoot and oscillate Integral as with proportional gain increasing the integral gain J also results in a larger heater response but integral feedback doesn t respond as quickly Integral feedback is slow because it works by adjusting its previous output rather than re calculating its output from scratch at each feedback cycle Therefore integral feedback has a tendency to overshoot the setpoint and cause oscillations When I is reduced to 0 001 W C s the temperature at first responds quickly due to the action of the proportional feedback However close inspection see the lowest trace in the bottom graph reveals that the temperature doesn t actually reach the 70 setpoint within the time period shown Without enough integral gain temperature errors tend to persist for a long period of time As an approximate guide the integral gain should be about one tenth the proportional ga
2. list menu list instruction list List prints a list of top level menus If the 1ist suffix is appended to the name of any menu System Channel System COM Channel PID etc the CTC100 lists the available instructions for the menu or submenu If appended to an instruction the 1ist suffix returns a list of arguments required for the instruction A question mark after the 1ist query is optional The list suffix is only available for instructions that set some sort of variable and is not available for program flow instructions such as if while abort and kill In the examples that follow the first line is the remote command while the remaining lines are the CTC100 s reply Outl list pid Name Value Off Low Imt Hi lmt Units IO type Plot Logging Stats Points Average SD Selected Debug Cycle Reset In this case the reply is a list of arguments that can be appended to the instruction Out1 The dot at the end of pid indicates that Out 1 pid is another menu not a complete instruction Outl pid list Input P I D Setpoint Mode Step Y Lag Sq root Ramp Memory T min Since Out1 pid is a menu the reply lists the instructions available in the menu Outl pid setpoint list pid Setpoint float Out1 pid setpoint is an instruction so the reply indicates that it takes a single floating point argument Outl value list Out 1 Value float 0 000 1200 If an argument has minimum and maximum values thes
3. A list of options for temperature input In 1 is displayed The upper left green button for example shows the name of the channel the name can be changed by touching the button The Value button shows the sensor reading but since the sensor is an input its value can t be changed from the front panel and therefore the button is greyed out Touch the Lopass button in the third column A list of lowpass filter time constants appears To get more information about the Lopass setting press the Help key which displays a pop up window with a brief description of whatever is showing on the screen Touch the OK button or press the Help key again to dismiss the help window In the Lopass menu select the value that is closest to your heater s response time By reducing noise the filter improves the accuracy of the PID tuning process and the performance of the tuned PID feedback loop The larger the lowpass value is the less noise there will be however a value larger than the heater s response time will slow down the feedback Configure the alarm To protect your system from being damaged by excessive heater power which can occur if for example the PID feedback is configured incorrectly or the sensor becomes disconnected it s important to set up an alarm The alarm automatically shuts off the heater whenever the temperature exceeds limits that you specify whenever the sensor becomes disconnected and when
4. Command line Opens a File Grapher command line window The commands described in the table below can be typed into the command line Sequences of commands can be stored as macros and then recalled either from the command line or the Special menu Align X axes Sets the X axis range of all graphs to be equal to the X axis range of the selected graph Add graph Adds another graph to the display When more than one graph is displayed you can select a graph by clicking on it Most operations only apply to the selected graph Overall plot size Changes the size of the entire plot window and all the graphs in the window Set as baseline When this option is selected the channel that is currently displayed is subsequently subtracted from all displayed data until Clear baseline is selected Selecting this option does not change the actual data that s stored in the program it just changes how the data is displayed Clear baseline Disables the baseline feature This option is grayed out if no baseline is currently set Subtract average When selected each file s data is displayed with its average subtracted Selecting this option does not modify the data stored in the program just the way the data is displayed The process menu lets you modify data The operations are applied to an internal copy of the data i e a buffer and do not affect log files on disk When you select an item from the process menu a dialog may appear asking
5. CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 28 The system fan The CTC100 s fan regulates the temperature of the heater output and sensor input circuits Air enters through vents in the top and rear of the instrument and exits through the a vent in the bottom cover The vents should always be left unobstructed or the CTC100 may overheat and be damaged The heater output and sensor input circuits are contained on four I O cards At every A D conversion each I O card reads an internal temperature sensor and determines how fast it needs the system fan to run The main system processor reads the desired fan speed from each I O card and sets the fan to the fastest requested speed For the heater output cards the requested fan speed depends on the temperature of the card s heatsink the amount of current being delivered and the voltage drop across the heater If the temperature of a heater card exceeds 60 C its output is automatically shut off Set the output to zero to re enable it for example by pressing the Output Enable key which will disable all the CTC100 s outputs or by pressing the Channel Off button For the sensor input cards the requested fan speed depends on the card s internal temperature and the temperature specified with the Channel PCB control If the card temperature is below its Channel PCB setting the card doesn t request any cooling and its temperature is unregulated The default PCB setting is 35 C I
6. Setup screen System tab IP column DHCP System IP DHCP On Off Enables or disables the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol If DHCP is set to on and a DHCP server is present on the network the other IP settings are automatically configured and are greyed out Address System IP Address address Sets the IP address in dot decimal notation Subnet System IP Subnet subnet Sets the subnet mask Gateway System IP Gateway gateway Sets the gateway for communications outside of the local network In general this setting is not needed since the CTC does not initiate communications outside the local network Telnet System IP Telnet portNumber Sets the telnet port for Ethernet communications Remote commands can be sent to the CTC through a telnet connection on the selected port The port must be a value between 0 and 65535 inclusive and should normally be either 23 the default or a value greater than 1024 SRS CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 54 Setup screen System tab Display column Units System Display Units C K mK F Sensor Sets the temperature units for the entire instrument Temperature measurements are both displayed and logged in the specified units If the units are changed in the middle of an experiment there will appear to be a large jump in all of the temperature records Five options are available C K mK F and Sensor If the Sensor option is se
7. C CTC 00 Programmable Temperature Controller Specifications viii 30 Q range 0 00040 C 100 Q range t 0 0020 C 300 Q range t 0 0040 C 1 kQ range 0 010 C 3 kQ range t0 060 C 10 kO range t0 20 C 30 kO range t10 C 100 kO range 30 C 300 kO range 200 C 2 5 MQ range 300 C RMS noise DC at midrange 100 range 0 0003 0 300 range 0 001 0 100 0 range 0 002 0 300 Q range 0 006 0 1 kQ range 0 02 Q 3 kQ range 0 06 Q 10 kO range 0 20 30 kO range 1 00 100 kO range 60 300 kO range 400 2 5 MO range 100 Diodes Excitation current 10 pA Initial accuracy t 100 ppm Drift t5 ppm C Voltage input 0 2 5 V Initial accuracy 10 pV 0 01 of reading Drift 5 ppm C RMS noise 3 uV RTDs Range 0 10 30 100 3000 1 3 30 300 250 kQ 2 5 MQ or auto Excitation 100 range 3mA 300 range 3mA 100 0 range 2mA 300 Q range mA 1 kQ range 500 uA 3 kQ range 200 uA 10 kQ range 50 uA 30 kO range 50 uA 100 kO range 5 uA 300 kO range 5 uA 2 5 MO range 1 uA Initial accuracy 10 Q range 0 005 Q 30 Q range 0 005 Q 100 Q range 0 008 Q 300 range 0 015 Q 50 mK for Pt100 RTD at 25 C 1 kQ range 0 05 Q 3 kQ range 0 1 0 10 kO range 0 25 Q 30 kO range 10 100 kO range 40 300 kO range 130 2 5 MQ range 3 kQ SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Specifications ix Typical drift due to temperature at midrange 100 range 300 range 100 0 range 300 Q range 1 kO range 3 kQ range 10 kO
8. Push button switch order key cap separately eg 0 996 74HCO08 Quad 2 Input AND Gate Non GPIB version Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 140 C211 5 00375 100P Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 C212 5 00472 4 7U T35 SMD TANTALUM D Case C213 5 00395 4700P 5 Capacitor Mono 50V 5 X7R 1206 C214 5 00299 Au Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C215 5 00299 1U Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C216 5 00329 120U Capacitor Electrolytic 35V 20 Rad C217 5 00384 560P Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 C218 5 00318 2 2U T35 SMD TANTALUM C Case C221 5 00318 2 2U T35 SMD TANTALUM C Case C223 5 00318 2 2U T35 SMD TANTALUM C Case C224 5 00318 2 2U T35 SMD TANTALUM C Case C227 5 00041 220U Capacitor Electrolytic 50V 20 Rad C228 5 00041 220U Capacitor Electrolytic 50V 20 Rad C229 5 00041 220U Capacitor Electrolytic 50V 20 Rad C241 500375 100P Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 C242 5 00628 22U 35V C244 5 00399 01U 596 Capacitor Mono 50V 596 X7R 1206 C245 5 00640 100U 10V C246 5 00640 100U 10V C251 500375 100P Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 C252 5 00628 22U 35V C253 5 00628 22U 35V C254 5 00399 01U 5 Capacitor Mono 50V 5 X7R 1206 C255 5 00640 100U 10V C256 5 00640 100U 10V D161 3 00204 1N5230 1N5230 4 7V 500mW DO 35 ZENER DIODE D211 3 00
9. R442 4 02483 60K R250 4 02519 MAX5491WC30000 R251 4 02519 MAX5491WC30000 R550 4 02519 MAX5491WC30000 SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 147 R551 4 02519 MAX5491W C30000 R436 4 02520 634K 5PPM R444 4 02520 634K 5PPM R642 4 02524 500K 0 196 R742 4 02524 500K 0 1 C352 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C353 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C362 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C363 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C372 5 00525 1U CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C373 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C612 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C271 5 00526 22U T16 SMD TANTALUM C Case C111 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C112 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C113 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C121 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C122 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C123 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C124 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C210 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C230 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C231 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C250 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C260 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C261 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C270 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C280 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C281 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C300 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C302 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C310 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C311 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C330 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C331 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C332 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C340 5 00601 0 1UF 16V
10. SRS time is set back by one hour any data taken over the last hour is no longer plotted and newly acquired data appears in its place The data is not erased from the USB log it just doesn t appear on the plot Date System Other Date date Sets the date Does not affect time stamps on previously acquired data points About System Other About Displays a text box with information about the firmware version and installed I O cards Reset System Other Reset Running macros Saved macros Display Ports Port settings Channels Log All Running macros stops all running macros Has no effect on saved macros Saved macros deletes all saved macros from local memory Does not delete macros from USB memory devices Has no effect on running macros Display Resets all settings in the System screen s Display column to their factory defaults Returns the front panel to the Select menu de selects all channels in all groups and erases locally stored log data data on USB drives is not affected Returns all plots to autoscaled X and Y with a 1 minute X range and changes the plot location of all channels to 1 Ifa TRG remote command was previously received re enables automatic A D conversions Hides the internal temperature display T PCB Ports Closes all I O ports and re opens them USB and Telnet connections are lost The port settings baud rate IP address etc remain unchanged Port settings Resets all I O port se
11. program IEEE488 while system else channel Simple programs for example a series of temperature ramps can be entered from the front panel To enter a program from the front panel first press the program key to show the Program screen Touch the Progress window and a list of available top level commands appears A dot at the end of a command means that touching that button will bring up a sub menu of instructions For example the command to change the feedback setpoint channel PID setpoint is accessed by first touching the channel button See the Programming section of this manual for a full list of commands Touch the left square bracket the button in the upper left corner Square brackets surround blocks of code to be repeated The menu of instructions closes and the first line in the Progress window is now a left square bracket New program TI Clear Progress Load Save Delete Input Messages Touch the Progress window again anywhere beneath the first line The list of possible instructions appears again Select program from the list The sub menu that appears contains a list of instructions that affect the program For example cls clears the Messages window name assigns a name to the program and kill ends a named program CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 49 SRS Command clearAlarms kill run clearErrors name standby cls pause waitFo
12. 4 01050 4 01404 4 01296 4 01670 4 01242 4 01117 4 02547 4 00645 4 01471 4 01471 4 01707 4 01707 4 00910 4 01707 4 01764 UNDECIDED PART 10UH 6611 TYPE 43 6611 TYPE 43 PTC431 2A DC OU IRLR3110ZPBF BSS123LT1 BSS123LT1 BSS123LT1 BSS123LT1 IRF6218S IRF6218S IRF6218S IRLR3110ZPBF 300 5 23K 100K 5 23K 100K 0 1 2 61K 66 5K 1 37K 121 56 2K 604 0 01 ohm 4 7K 4 7K 4 7K 4 7K 2 26K 4 02K 2 49K 1 00K 200 4 02K 2 49K 1 00K 200 4 02K 2 49K 1 00K 200 0 1 ohm 1 ohm 10 200 200 200 976K 73 2K 20K 1 20 0K 1 00K 120 OHM 10W 4 7K 470 470 47KX4D 47KX4D 1 0KX4D 47KX4D 10X4D Inductor SMD Type R 23MHz 240mA 10 1210 Ferite Bead Thru hole Type 43 Ferite Bead Thru hole Type 43 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Wire wound Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 1 8W 5 1206 Resistor Thick Film 1 8W 5 1206 Resistor Thick Film 1 8W 5 1206 Resistor Thick Film 1 8W 5 1206 Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Res
13. AIO DIO In 1 In 3 Out 1 Out2 AlO1 DIO 24 53 C 0 000 A 0 000W 10 00 V 0 In 2 In 4 AIO2 Relays 2434 C 2531 C 10 00 0 AIO 3 V1 10 00 V AIO 4 10 00 V Buttons turn red whenever the channel s alarm is triggered The name of the channel appears in bold if the channel uses a custom calibration table Touch one or more buttons to select channels to view on the Show Data and Setup screens Group l Group 2 etc Group 1 2 3 4 The top of the Select Channels screen has four blue tabs that can be used to save and recall groups of selected channels Touch one of these Group tabs to select the channels in the group all other channels are de selected To modify the definition of a group simply select or de select channels while the group is selected The group number also appears in the top left corner of the screen Touch the group number to advance to the next group Repeatedly pressing the Select Channels key also advances to the next group Show Data screen This screen displays data from the selected channels as graphs or as numbers The tabs at the top of the screen control how data is displayed Press the Show Data key repeatedly to change the selection group Each of the four groups remembers its display format single multiple etc as SRS CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 4l SRS well as the plot s X and Y range Therefore when you change the
14. Any nonzero value tells the tuner to enable derivative feedback which makes the feedback faster but can also add noise If D is set to zero the tuner uses a different tuning algorithm that leaves derivative feedback disabled This is sometimes necessary to avoid excessive noise in the feedback output Start the feedback autotuner If the system has never been tuned start with the feedback turned off and the heater at ambient temperature On the other hand if the system has been tuned before it s better to enable the feedback and wait for the temperature to stabilize at the setpoint In either case the key to successful autotuning is to start with a stable temperature If starting at ambient temperature ensure that the feedback is turned off before enabling the outputs select the output channel on the Select Channels screen then press the Setup key select the tab for the output channel and touch the Off button If the outputs are disabled enable them by pressing the Output Enable key twice The red Output Enable LED turns on and the CTC100 beeps if pressed again the Output Enable key immediately turns all the CTC100 s outputs off inputs are not affected In the PID menu touch Mode and select auto to start the autotuner A status window appears and is updated every few seconds Before it begins the actual tuning process the CTC100 measures the baseline temperature drift Assume that Step Y is set to 2 W and Lag is se
15. C Case Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 138 C632 C633 C641 C64 C64 C64 C64 C64 C648 D301 D302 D303 D304 D305 D306 D307 D308 D441 D603 D645 D646 J101 J201 J202 J440 J470 J630 J640 JD301 SNOWY L63 L64 L64 L64 L644 PC1 R102 R103 R104 R105 R106 R107 R201 R202 R301 R441 R442 R443 R444 R446 R447 R448 R449 R450 R543 R603 R631 R633 R634 R642 R643 RN101 Ww Neme N SRS 5 00371 5 00371 5 0003 1 5 00299 5 00031 5 00299 5 00371 5 00371 5 00371 5 00371 3 00575 3 00575 3 00575 3 00575 3 00575 3 00575 3 00575 3 00575 3 00575 3 00010 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 342 342 178 00006 290 075 00251 00350 180 00236 6 00236 6 00236 6 00236 6 00236 6 00236 6 00236 6 00236 7 02143 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 722 724 439 725 439 431 725 725 725 725 242 155 251 725 726 726 726 726 725 467 551 551 406 406 406 4 00911 47P 47P 220U AU 220U AU 47P 47P 47P 47P GREEN MI GREEN MIN GREEN MI GREEN MI GREEN MI GREEN MI GREEN MIN GREEN MI GREEN MI GREEN STZ5 6NT146 STZ5 6N
16. C306 5 00716 100P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C307 5 00716 100P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C200 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C201 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C202 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C203 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C204 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C205 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C206 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C500 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C501 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C502 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C503 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C504 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C505 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C506 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C641 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C741 5 00740 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603 C652 5 00752 10000P Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 0603 C752 5 00752 10000P Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 0603 C272 5 00841 1UF 16V X5R C290 5 00841 1UF 16V X5R C291 5 00841 1UF 16V X5R C292 5 00841 1UF 16V X5R C293 5 00841 1UF 16V X5R C294 5 00841 1UF 16V X5R C590 5 00841 1UF 16V
17. It can also indicate a failure of the CTC100 s output circuit Output card overheated Either the resistance of the heater is less than 10 ohms the positive and negative terminals are shorted to each other the ambient temperature is too high or the CTC100 s chassis fan is not working Try reducing the maximum output voltage or current and make sure the front panel fan is running 10V analog I O channels Each of the four analog I O channels has a BNC connector on the back panel of the CTC100 The outer shell of the connector is grounded Each analog I O channel can be an input 10V 24 bit ADC or an output 10V 16 bit DAC Although they aren t as accurate as the dedicated sensor inputs and heater outputs the analog I O channels can be used to read temperature sensors and drive heaters If used to drive a heater each analog I O channel can only supply up to 30 mA of current Furthermore because of their limited accuracy when set to 0 V the analog outputs may still feed a small amount of power to the heater This residual current can be eliminated by placing a diode in series with the heater and increasing the channel s Lo Lmt setting to about 0 5V to prevent integral windup Relays digital I O and virtual channels The CTC100 has four relays each rated for up to 5A of current The connector for the relays is a single 12 pin pluggable terminal block The four relays are labeled A through D and each relay has th
18. T1 Package 3mm diameter BAV170LT1 DUAL DIODE COMMON CATHODE BAV170LT1 DUAL DIODE COMMON CATHODE LED T1 Package 3mm diameter LED T1 Package 3mm diameter LED T1 Package 3mm diameter LED T1 Package 3mm diameter Hi Speed Optocoupler Hi Speed Optocoupler Header DIM Locking Clips DB Female Right Angle 318 3 Row Right Angle Mount MMBT3904LT1 3904 NPN MMBT3904LT1 3904 NPN MMBT3904LT1 3904 NPN MMBT3904LT1 3904 NPN Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 155 U220 U270 U310 U321 U360 U410 U420 ZO Zi Z2 Z3 Z4 ASRS 3 00787 3 00749 3 0 3 0 322 460 3 00814 3 0 375 3 00741 7 0 738 0 00306 0 00306 0 0 1 0 093 186 74HC595 74HC541 LT14
19. Tuning ends when the lag period has elapsed and the rate of temperature change is less than half of the fastest rate observed during the tuning process The tuner then calculates the maximum rate of temperature change the slope the lag time and the total response and uses these values to calculate the PID gains Because the slope calculation is sensitive to noise it s important to enable the lopass filter on the feedback input channel to achieve accurate tuning results Since the relay tuner does not require a slope measurement it s less sensitive to noise than the step response tuner If the tuning mode is set to Auto the CTC100 selects the relay tuner if both its high and low outputs are within the heater s limits otherwise it selects the step response tuner In particular if CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 35 SRS the output is off when autotuning is started the step response tuner runs because the relay tuner would require a negative out9put Aggressive moderate and conservative tuning Both the step response and relay tuners offer aggressive moderate and conservative tuning options Conservative tuning theoretically produces zero overshoot and is usually the best choice when the temperature needs to follow a changing setpoint The aggressive tuning option theoretically produces 25 overshoot although in fact it tends to be larger and is usually the best choice for applications in
20. Whenever the most recent data is visible on the graph the graph automatically scrolls to keep the most recent data visible If the most recent data is not visible the words X lock appear in the bottom left corner of the screen to indicate that scrolling is disabled To show current data and resume scrolling touch the words X lock Graphs that appear together on a screen always have the same X axis range However each selection group has its own independent X axis range CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller SRS Operation 44 ASRS Touch this area Touch this area to zoom out to zoom in How to change the X axis scale mapa Touch this area and drag to pan How to pan the graph horizontally By default the CTC100 continually adjusts the Y axis scale to accommodate all the data on the graph Each graph has its own independent Y axis scale To change the Y axis scale for a particular graph touch the area to the left of its Y axis Touch the top third of the Y axis to zoom out Automatic scaling is disabled so the Y axis scale no longer changes as new data is acquired Touch the middle third to 1 re enable automatic scaling and 2 reset automatic scaling that is ignore previously acquired data and adjust the Y range to accommodate only new data Touch the bottom third to zoom in Automatic scaling is disabled CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 45 SRS Touch this a
21. a macro button appears to be selected whenever a macro with the name shown on the button is running whether the macro was started by touching the button with a remote command or from the Program screen Touching a selected macro button stops all currently running macros with that name regardless of how the macros were started See the Macro Names topic in the Remote Programming section for more information on how macro names are assigned Setup screen System tab Log column Interval System Log Interval off 0 1 s 0 3 s 1 s 3 s 10 s 30 s 1 min 3 min 10 min 30 min 1 hr Sets the default time between log points If the interval is set for example to 1 s the CTC saves a data point once per second and each point represents the average reading over one second period Note that each channel has its own log interval setting Channel Logging that can override the default interval CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 52 SRS Clear System Log clear yes no Press this button and select yes to erase all data from the current log folder on the USB device The CTC100 s RAM is also cleared After clearing the log the plot will be blank until new data is acquired Folder System Log folder FolderName Sets the USB device folder into which data is logged If the folder does not exist it is created If the folder does exist and already contains log files data is appended to the exist
22. conversions occur every six cycles of the AC voltage if the CTC100 is plugged into a 60 Hz AC wall socket or every five cycles for 50 Hz AC This prevents 60 Hz noise from aliasing into temperature readings which would cause a slow sinusoidal variation in the readings 60 Hz noise could still create a constant offset in the temperature readings but the offset is usually too small to be of concern with thermocouples and can be removed from RTD readings using current reversal CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 26 It is possible to uncouple A D conversions from the line frequency by moving the Trigger source jumper on the motherboard to the 1 MHz clock position note that the jumper should only be moved while the system is switched off In this case the A D rate can be set to any value between 10 and 1000 ms with a resolution of 1 us However A D conversions will no longer be perfectly synchronized with the AC line voltage even if the rate is set to a multiple of the line period As a result low frequency sinusoidal noise may appear in your temperature sensor readings The frequency of the noise is equal to the difference between the AC line frequency and the closest multiple of the A C conversion rate all expressed in Hertz For example if the A D rate is 10 1 Hz and the AC line frequency is 60 Hz a sine wave with a frequency of 60 6 10 1 0 6 Hz may be superimposed on your temperature readings Log rate
23. if the device is full not formatted or defective the triangle will remain dark blue and not turn white Removing the USB memory device or powering down the CTC100 while USB logging is on causes loss of data and corruption of the memory device A corrupted device should be repaired by plugging it into a PC and running a program such as chkdsk Windows or fsck Linux Help key Command help The Help key displays a popup screen that provides more information about whatever is currently visible on the CTC100 s display Some screens that don t accept any user input may not have any Help information Output Enable key SRS OutputEnable on off Immediately after the CTC is turned on its inputs function normally but its outputs are disabled This safety feature gives you a chance to adjust the CTC100 s settings before it begins to provide power to the heaters To turn on the outputs press the Output Enable key twice A red light next to the Output Enable key turns on to indicate that the outputs are active and any PID feedback loops that were previously running begin to provide power to the heaters If the outputs are enabled pressing the Output Enable key once disables all outputs setting them to zero Inputs continue to function normally In an emergency situation the Output Enable key is the quickest way to turn off the CTC100 s outputs Re enabling the outputs immediately returns all outputs to their pr
24. the trace begins at zero The offset is recalculated whenever you touch the graph to zoom or pan or whenever you switch to another screen and back to the Plot screen If you don t touch the CTC100 s front panel the offset is never recalculated Viewing the Ponytail plot does not cause offsets to be subtracted from logged data or feedback setpoints Ponytail Ponytail plot 0 005 8 50 15 am Jun 26 15 SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 43 Numeric System display type numeric Numeric SUM KY 24 740 25 290 Touch the Numeric tab to see the current values of the selected channels as numbers Up to 22 channels can be displayed The more channels that are selected the smaller the numbers are If enough space is available the type of sensor or output may be displayed and an annunciator may appear that indicates whether the sensor or heater is disconnected N A over range Hi under range Lo if Output Enable is off Off or if an internal error has occurred Err Channel displays turn red whenever the channel s alarm is triggered The name of the channel appears in bold if the channel uses a custom calibration table Touch one of the channels to go to its setup menu Zooming and panning To change the X axis scale of a plot touch anywhere inside the plot Touch the right half of the plot to zoom in Touch the left half to zoom out e Drag to pan
25. version where serial number is the instrument s five digit serial number and version is the firmware version number LMC Learn Macro Command Returns a comma separated list containing the names of all available macros NOP No Operation Does nothing OPC Operation Complete Pauses the parent macro until all ongoing CTC100 operations have finished then sets the Operation Complete bit in the Event Status register OPC is intended to indicate that all previous instructions in the macro have been completed OPC is not generally required because most CTC100 instructions are fully processed before the next instruction in the macro is begun The exceptions are PID autotuning i e channel tune mode and ramp to setpoint channel setpoint if channel ramp is nonzero It s also possible to overlap instructions by sending a macro before the previous macro has finished OPC waits for all autotuning processes to finish regardless of whether they were started by the parent macro or not It also waits for all setpoint ramps to finish regardless of how those ramps were started Finally if two or more macros are running at the same time OPC waits until all other macros started by the source port have finished running before setting the Operation Complete bit If the GPIB port starts two macros that contain WAI OPC or OPC instructions the result is a deadlock and both macros pause indefinitely A deadlock does not CTC100 Programma
26. 01349 4 71KX4D 10KX4D 4 7KX4D 470X4D 470X4D 470X4D 470X4D ATMEGA64 16AC 4ABT16245CMTD LM34DM LM3478MM NOPB LM358 TL431CD5 LTC6102HMS LTC6102HMS LTC6102HMS LTC1655 LMC6484AIM DG408DY LMC6484AIM MAX6241BCSA LTC2433 1CMS DG333ADW 78M05 79M05CDT RK 74HC08 74HC595 74HC138D 1 5 WIRE 7109DG 8 32 X 5 8 PP Analog I O card assembly 297 C101 C102 C103 C105 C106 C107 C108 C201 C202 C203 C204 C205 C206 C207 C208 C209 C210 C211 C212 C213 C214 C215 C216 C217 C225 C226 C227 C232 C233 SRS 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00470 5 00525 5 00470 5 00299 5 004771 5 00527 5 00601 5 00601 5 00527 5 00527 5 00527 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00627 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00381 5 00299 5 00471 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 2 2U T16 1U 2 2U T16 1U 10U T16 A7U 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 47U 47U 47U 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1U X4 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 330P 1U 10U T16 Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny LM34DM TEMP SE
27. 1 U2 for slot 2 etc While the firmware is updating the front panel LCD and fan turn off After about 15 seconds power is restored to the front panel and a status message is displayed on screen a p ON At this point the new firmware is already running however after all firmware updates are complete the CTC100 should be turned off and back on again to ensure that the I O card is properly initialized SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 72 Replacing the memory backup battery The CTC100 has a CR2032 battery which is responsible for keeping the following information in memory Time and date Most user settings User macros that have been saved with the define instruction or with the Save button in the Program window The instrument s serial number If the battery fails these settings will be lost each time the CTC100 is switched off Factory calibration data is stored in EEPROM and is not affected by loss of the CR2032 battery voltage The battery can be replaced by the following procedure 1 Unplug the CTC100 from the wall This is important since otherwise live AC voltages may be present inside the chassis even if the CTC100 is switched off 2 Remove the four black screws that secure the top cover Lift the cover off of the instrument 3 Looking at the front of the CTC100 the battery should be clearly visible It is a 20 mm diameter coin cell located on the left side of the in
28. 3525A 3525A POWER SUPPLY CONTROLLER U240 3 01347 LM2670S 3 3 Uu250 3 01348 LM2670S 5 Y110 6 00692 16MHZ SMT ZO 1 00470 4 PIN 24AWG WH Non board mount Female 24 AWG Z1 1 00087 2 PIN JUMPER 2 PIN JUMPER ON J160 amp J203 Z2 1 00254 2 PIN 22AWG RD Non board mount Female Seperate wire 22 AWG Z3 1 00259 4 PIN IBAWG OR Non board mount Female Seperate wire 18 AWG Z4 0 00043 4 40 KEP Z5 0 00129 5 24 Z6 0 00187 4 40X1 4PP LJ 0 00390 1 72X1 4 TO HOLD CNCTRS DOWN SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 142 Z8 Z9 Z10 Z11 0 00391 0 01015 0 01016 0 01093 1 72X5 32X3 64 11RED 18 11 BLK 18 563002B00000 Front panel assembly 210 C101 C102 C103 C105 C106 C107 C108 C201 C202 C203 C205 C211 C212 C213 C214 C301 C302 C303 C304 C331 C360 C361 C362 C370 D101 D201 D202 D203 D204 D205 D206 D341 150350 J106 J201 J301 J341 J360 J370 PCI Q342 Q360 Q361 Q362 R104 R105 R201 R202 R301 R302 R331 R360 R361 R362 R363 R364 SRS 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00604 5 00604 5 00604 5 00604 5 005 5 005 5 005 9 3 3 5 00389 5 00407 5 005 5 005 5 005 5 00601 9 9 9 3 00576 3 000 3 000 3 000 3 000 0 0 0 0 3 00009 3 000 1 3 01253 3 014 4 1 01253 1 00559 1 00473 1 00045 1 01250 1 01251 7 02183 3 01989 3 01989 3 01989 3 01
29. 475 Cryo Con S800 1 4 385 S900 1 5 500 RX 102A 0 050 40 LakeShore RX 103A 1 2 40 Ruthenium RX 202A 0 050 40 oxide Scientific Instruments RO600 0 300 R400 2 0 273 Cryo Con R500 0 050 20 IEC751 DIN43760 48 15 1173 15 RTD All US 48 15 1173 15 100 Q 193 15 373 15 3000 193 15 373 15 1000 O 193 15 373 15 2252 Q 193 15 523 15 Measurement 3000 O 193 15 523 15 ion 5000 Q 93 15 523 15 Thermistor 6000 Q 193 15 523 15 formerly YSI Oo 10000 Q type B 193 15 523 15 mega 10000 Q type H 193 15 523 15 30 kO 233 15 523 15 100 kQ 233 15 423 15 300 kQ 298 15 423 15 MO 298 15 423 15 Other kinds of resistive and diode sensors can be used but require custom calibration curves For example rhodium iron germanium and carbon glass sensors have too much sensor to sensor variability to use a standard curve and therefore must be individually calibrated j SRS CTCI100 Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 4 SRS Connecting the sensor The CTC100 has two 9 pin D sub DB9 sockets that mate with any standard DB9 plug such as Amphenol L717SDEO09P with backshell 17E 1657 09 Two plugs and backshells are provided with each CTC100 Here is the pinout of the two sockets as they appear when looking at the CTC100 s back panel 5 2 5 l4 V2 9 V4 9 4 12 4 14 V2 8 V4 8 3 Gnd 3 Gnd VI 7 2 I V3 7 B VI 6 V3 6 Hl 13 Sensor In 1 for example should be connected to pins
30. 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R385 4 02107 301 Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R615 4 02128 499 Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R715 4 02128 499 Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R613 4 02157 1 00K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R614 4 02157 1 00K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R713 4 02157 1 00K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R714 4 02157 1 00K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R612 4 02186 2 00K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R712 4 02186 2 00K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R233 4 02195 2 49K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R533 4 02195 2 49K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R381 4 02217 4 22K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R386 4 02217 4 22K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R382 4 02224 4 99K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R387 4 02224 4 99K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R611 4 02224 4 99K Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R711 4 02224 4 99K Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R260 4 02253 10 0K Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R261 4 02253 10 0K Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R560 4 02253 10 0K Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R561 4 02253 10 0K Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R434 4 02483 60K
31. At a basic level macros can be used to program temperature profiles or other sequences of events Macros can also be employed in more advanced ways to tailor the behavior of the CTC100 for your experiment for example infinite loop macros running as background tasks can take steps to address alarm conditions or automatically switch between sensor inputs or heater outputs depending the value of some input SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction Connecting the inputs and outputs The CTC100 has four temperature sensor inputs two powered heater outputs four 10V analog I O channels four 5A relays and eight digital I O lines Temperature sensor inputs The CTC100 has four multi range inputs each of which can read resistive sensors having resistances between 1 Q and 2 5 MO and diode sensors having voltage drops of up to 2 5V Standard calibration curves are included for the sensors shown in the following table The Range column indicates the range of the standard calibration curve if the sensor is outside this range no reading appears It may be possible to increase the range by uploading a custom calibration curve Sensor Manufacturer Calibration Range class type K Si410 1 0 450 Scientific Instruments Si430 1 0 400 Si440 1 0 500 DT 470 CY7 1 4 475 Diode LakeShore Omega DT 670 CY670 1 4 500 S700 1 5
32. CTC100 s front panel and touching the blue System tab has controls for setting up the CTC100 s RS 232 GPIB and Ethernet interfaces under the COM and IP columns The USB interface requires no setup on the CTC100 but may require installing a driver on the PC CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 16 SRS The RS 232 port requires RTS CTS flow control which some PC serial ports do not support If the CTC100 sometimes drops characters from the RS 232 messages that it receives try using a USB to RS 232 adapter or use the USB interface instead The USB port uses the Linux gadget serial driver which is a common driver that is already installed on some PCs If the PC asks for a driver follow these instructions Install the USB driver for Windows PCs 1 Download the driver from the SRS website at www thinksrs com click Downloads gt Software Unzip the downloaded file 2 Using a standard USB A B cable plug the CTC100 into the PC 3 The New Hardware Found wizard appears on the PC Tell the wizard not to search the web for the driver choose the option to select the driver from a list or specific location If asked to specify the hardware type select Ports Click Have disk browse to the file that you downloaded and select gserial Windows7 inf for Windows 7 or gserial inf for older versions of Windows You may get a message saying that the driver has not passed Windows logo testing 4 Once
33. Fahrenheit to Celsius Assuming the contents of a buffer are expressed in F converts the data to C Align start time Shifts one buffer in time so that its earliest time matches the earliest time of another buffer Useful for comparing results from two different experiments Average plotted buffers Replaces the contents of whichever buffer is plotted in black with the average of all plotted buffers Copy Creates a new buffer that contains a copy of all data from an existing buffer Crop Creates a new buffer that contains a copy of data from an existing buffer Only points that falls within the graph s X range are copied Derivative Replaces each data point with the difference between it and the succeeding point CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 122 Special menu SRS Downsample Reduces the number of points in a buffer by averaging two or more neighboring points together and storing the result in a single point You re asked to provide a downsampling constant which is the number of neighboring points to average together A downsampling constant of 3 for example reduces the number of points in the buffer to one third of its previous value Lowpass Removes noise by emulating an analog RC lowpass filter Similar to the CTC100 s lowpass filter except it s first order rather than sixth order Median filter Removes single point noise spikes with a sliding window median filter The f
34. I Option White White Unconnected Black Black Option 2 Black Black Unconnected White White Two wire sensors can be converted to four wire sensors by soldering two additional wires one on each side of the sensing element and as close to the sensing element as possible The higher the resistance of an RTD or thermistor the more sensitive it is to ambient electromagnetic noise Therefore it s important in these cases to use a shielded cable Diode sensors can be connected in either direction If the cathode is connected to V and I and the anode to V and I Channel Current should be set to Forward If the diode is connected in the opposite direction the current should be set to Reverse Diode sensors are especially susceptible to electromagnetic noise because the diode rectifies any noise picked up by the sensor leads increasing the measured voltage It may be necessary to put EMI filters not only the on the sensor leads but also on all other leads entering the Dewar The filters should be located at the point where the wires enter the Dewar and the Dewar itself should be grounded D sub and circular connectors with built in filters can be obtained from Spectrum CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 5 SRS Advanced Specialty Products We have found their 4000 pF pi filters to be effective These filters include capacitors to ground which should be connected to the Dewar The CTC100 can read AD590 sen
35. In 2 and In 4 also share the same PCB value If the card s temperature exceeds the maximum and System Other Fan is set to Auto the CTC100 increases the fan speed to reduce the card s temperature The PCB temperature is always in C regardless of the System Display Units setting The default setting is 35 C Reducing the maximum PCB temperature results in tighter regulation of the selected card s temperature at the expense of the other cards and more fan noise The fan speed is also determined by the cooling needs of the DC outputs Diff PositiveChannel Diff Negative channel This button lets you display the difference between two channels Touching this button displays a list of available channels Touch a channel and its value is then continuously subtracted from the channel indicated by the blue tab at the top of the Setup screen If for example the Setup menu for channel In 1 is showing and you touch the Diff button and select channel In 2 from the list channel In 1 s value becomes In 1 In 2 The raw value of channel In 1 can no longer be seen To turn the difference feature off touch Diff then touch whatever channel is currently selected The Diff button then shows an empty value Difference readings can be used as the input for PID feedback loops in which case the feedback maintains a constant temperature differential between two locations rather than a constant absolute temperature CTC100 Prog
36. Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN103 4 00910 1 0KX4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN105 4 01707 47KX4D RN206 4 00910 1 0KX4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 596 Tiny RN310 4 00909 470X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 596 Tiny RN312 4 00909 470X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 596 Tiny RN330 4 00909 470X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 596 Tiny RN332 4 00909 470X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 596 Tiny RN341 4 00908 270X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny U101 3 01497 ATMEGA162 16AI Uu102 3 01498 74ABT16245CMTD u201 3 01469 MAX6250BCSA 5V Reference Uu202 3 01499 DAC8534IPW U203 3 01838 MC33079D U204 3 01365 DG411DY Quad SPST 25ohms ONRes U205 3 01838 MC33079D U206 3 01369 DG409DY Diff Analog MUX 4 ch u209 3 01500 LTC2440CGN u302 3 00743 74HC138D 74HC138 3 to 8 line decoder demultiplexer inverting U331 3 00749 74HC541 74HC541 Octal 3 State Buffer Line Driver Receiver U340 3 00787 74HC595 74HC595 8 Bit Shift Register w Latched 3 state Outputs u350 3 00814 78M05 78M05 u360 3 01175 78M15 u370 3 01176 79M15 ZO 0 00472 1 329631 2 Jam nut for BNC connectors Zi 0 00306 4 40X3 16PP Z1 0 00772 1 5 WIRE Z2 0 00306 4 40X3 16PP Z2 7 01734 PTC ANALOG IO BRKT Digital I O card assembly 298 iii 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C112 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C113 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C121 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C122 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C123 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C124 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C
37. On Off Controls whether or not a channel is selected Selected channels are added to the current selection group and appear on the Numeric Plot and Channel screens Examples Inl selected on adds channel In 1 to the current selection group if it hasn t already been added Inl selected off removes channel In 1 from the current selection group Channel Sensor RTD Thermistor Diode ROX Temperature input channels only Selects the sensor type for a channel Select ROX for a ruthenium oxide sensor Thermistor for other NTC resistive sensors RTD for PTC resistive sensors and Diode for cryogenic diode sensors Some resistive cryogenic temperature sensors such as Rhodium Iron Germanium and Carbon Glass are not included in the list of available sensor types because they do not have standard calibration curves To use these sensors set the Sensor type to Thermistor or ROX and load a custom calibration table see Custom Calibration Tables in the Introduction of this manual Changing the sensor type may affect how the CTC hardware acquires data from the sensor In particular if the sensor type is changed from Thermistor to Diode the CTC acquires voltage instead of resistance readings and a special high accuracy excitation current source is used Also the RTD setting results in larger excitation currents than the other settings The sensor type also affects which instructions are available in the channe1 Cal menu For example if
38. PCI Q411 Q412 Q413 Q414 N41 N412 5 00519 5 00628 5 00381 5 00299 5 00299 3 00576 3 01342 3 01342 3 01342 3 01342 3 00380 3 00926 3 00010 3 01303 3 00806 3 00806 3 00011 3 00011 3 00011 3 00011 3 01320 3 00446 3 01320 3 00446 1 00251 1 00371 1 01090 1 00234 3 01056 3 01056 3 01056 3 01056 7 01710 3 00601 3 00601 3 00601 3 00601 4 01466 4 01270 4 01210 4 01163 4 01009 4 01466 4 01455 4 01406 4 01707 4 00911 4 00910 4 01707 4 00916 4 00916 4 01765 4 00909 4 00909 4 00909 4 00909 4 01707 4 01707 4 00911 4 00908 6 00683 3 01497 3 01498 3 01343 33U T35 22U 35V 330P Iu 1U RED MINI STZ5 6NT146 STZ5 6NT146 STZ5 6NT146 STZ5 6NT146 1N5248 MBRO540T 1 GREEN B340LA 13 F BAV170LT1 BAV170LT1 RED RED RED RED HCPL 2630 6N137 HCPL 2630 6N137 10 PIN DIL 25 PIN D RS232 1615490000 96 PIN RT ANGLE 24VDC DPDT 24VDC DPDT 24VDC DPDT 24VDC DPDT PTC MMBT3904LT1 MMBT3904LT1 MMBT3904LT1 MMBT3904LT1 300 39 2K 9 31K 3 01K 75 300 100 0 47KX4D 4 7KX4D 1 0KX4D 47KX4D 47X4D 47X4D OKX4D 470X4D 470X4D 470X4D 470X4D 47KX4D 47KX4D 4 7KX4D 270X4D VP1 0190 ATMEGA162 16AI 74ABT16245CMTD 74HC166D SMD TANTALUM Y Case Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 LED Subminiature 1 8mm T 3 4 1N5248 18V 500mW DO 35 ZENER DIODE MBRO540T1 Power Rectifier LED
39. X7R C341 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C342 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C345 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C411 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C421 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C510 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C530 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C531 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C550 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C560 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C561 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C580 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C581 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C611 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C620 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C621 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C622 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C630 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C631 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C640 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C650 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C651 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C660 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C661 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C670 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C671 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C672 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 148 C682 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C720 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C721 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C722 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C730 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C731 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C740 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C750 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C751 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C760 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C761 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C770 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C771 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C772 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C782 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C295 5 00654 01UF X4 C595 5 00654 O1UF X 4 C305 5 00716 100P Capacitor Mono 50V 0 25pF or 5 NPO 0603
40. Z3 Z4 j260 D111 D351 U610 U140 U300 u302 U340 U341 U342 U345 U350 U233 U380 U385 U533 U360 U370 U430 U432 U434 U436 U438 U440 U442 U444 K430 K431 K432 K433 K434 K435 K436 K437 0 00079 0 00089 00071 00234 00281 00281 00468 01067 01068 01331 3 00011 3 00489 3 00542 3 00656 3 00663 3 00743 3 00787 3 00787 3 00787 3 00787 3 00814 3 01133 3 01133 3 01133 3 01133 3 01175 3 01176 3 01302 3 01302 3 01302 3 01302 3 01302 3 01302 3 01302 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 o N UW Ww UJ O9 O9 UJ UJ O9 O9 O9 UJ O9 O9 O9 O9 O9 O9 O9 iw WO O0 0000000000000 0000 4 40X3 16 M F 4 8 PIN WHITE 96 PIN RT ANGLE 10 PIN DI 10 PIN DI 8 PIN 24AWG WH 9 PIN 9 PIN 1201 066 RED 1N5232 AD587JR LM34DM 74HC08 74HC138D 74HC595 74HC595 74HC595 74HC595 78M05 TL431CD5 TL431CD5 TL431CD5 TL431CD5 78M15 79M15 NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT NUD3105DMT G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 G6SK 2F DC5 MMBD1503A MMBD1503A MMBD1503A Header SIM Polarized 3 Row Right Angle Mount Header DIM Header DIM Non board mount Female 24 AWG LED T1 Package 3mm diam
41. a USB memory device Interface with a SRS If no USB memory stick or hard drive is present the CTC100 only stores the most recent 4096 data points for each channel older points are erased Therefore if the logging rate is 1 point per second only the most recent hour of data can be displayed In addition all stored data is lost if the CTC100 is turned off A USB memory stick can be used to keep a much longer record of logged data that won t be lost if the CTC100 is turned off Follow these steps to begin logging data to a USB storage device Save data to a USB device 1 Plug a USB memory stick into the port on the back of the instrument The memory stick should be freshly formatted and completely empty If you use the memory stick that came with the CTC100 copy the files onto a computer and format the memory stick before using it to log data N Wait about 5 seconds until the message Please wait while the USB drive is opened appears on screen The message stays on screen for several seconds while the log files are opened then the message disappears o2 Look for a small dark blue triangle in the upper right corner of the screen This is the USB logging indicator Touch the triangle When the triangle turns white which can take a few seconds the CTC100 is saving data to the USB device If the CTC100 is unable to write to the device the USB logging indicator will not turn white 4 Before turning the instrument off or
42. all I O ports are cleared All pending transmissions on all I O ports are cancelled The error queues for all I O ports are cleared The plot screen returns to showing the most recent data on autoscaled Y axes The instrument automatically triggers at the rate set with the A D rate control All log data is stored in the CTC100 s RAM is erased Logs on USB devices are not affected Unless data is being logged to a USB storage device all graphs on the Plot screen are empty after a RST command SRE O SRE Sets or gets the value of the Service Request Enable SRE register If a bit of the Status Byte register is set and the same bit of SRE is also set a GPIB Service Request is generated STB Returns the value of the Status Byte STB register The 8 bits of the Status Byte are assigned as follows SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 88 SRS Bit Value Description 7 128 Unassigned Always 0 6 64 Requested Service set when the CTC100 issues a GPIB service request 5 32 Event Summary Bit set when a bit is set in both the ESE and ESR registers 4 l6 Message Available set when data is waiting to be read on the GPIB port 3 8 Unassigned Always 0 2 4 Error Available set when errors are waiting in the error queue This bit will never be set unless System COM Verbose is set to Low 2 Unassigned Always 0 0 Alarm set when an alarm is triggered if the bit that s set
43. an external analog to PWM circuit and drive it with an analog I O channel First make channel V1 the feedback output and make it produce a value between 0 and 100 To do this select channel V1 and set the following parameters Low Imt 0 Hi Imt 100 O type Meas out PID input select the temperature channel to be controlled PID mode set to off for now CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming Ill ASRS PID setpoint set to the desired temperature Next select channel DIO and set the following parameters IO type set out PID input should be blank or the PID mode should be off Now run the following macro by sending it over a serial port in which case it all has to be on one line or by copying it onto a USB stick save it as a txt file in a directory named macros waitForSample d 0 if V1 gt t d 1 DIO d t 1 if t gt 100 t 0 1 To test the macro set V1 s value to 50 and plot channel DIO You should see a square wave with a duty cycle of 5096 and a period of 10 seconds high for 5 seconds low for 5 seconds high for 5 seconds etc Reduce V1 to 25 and the duty cycle should go to 2596 Before the feedback can be used the PID gain factors will need to be set by using the automatic tuning feature on channel V1 If tuning is successful the feedback should now operate normally If more than one feedback loop is required set up channel
44. are stored in an error buffer that can hold up to 20 messages Each I O port USB RS 232 etc has its own error buffer The geterror instruction returns the oldest message stored in the buffer and then removes the message from the buffer If the buffer is empty no errors is returned Only errors generated by the port over which the geterror instruction was received are reported If for example a geterror is received from the USB port it only reports errors caused by messages that were received by the USB port Geterror does not remove messages from the System Com Errors window kill Macro name kill all Stops all currently running macros with the given runtime name The runtime name is assigned with the name instruction and is not necessarily the same as the file name that a macro may be saved under kill all stops all currently running macros regardless of name or which port started the macro There is no kill query name Macro name Assigns a runtime name to the currently running macro A remote command or another macro can then use the kil1 instruction to stop the named macro In addition the name appears on the macro s tab in the Program screen The name can be any alphanumeric string up to 32 characters long and more than one macro can have the same name The name instruction does not affect the file name that a macro is defined under Errors If the runtime name is more than 32 characters long it is truncated
45. as 0 1 s or as long as 1 hour The log rate can be set independently for each channel or a single global rate used Data logged to USB devices can be transferred to a computer by plugging the USB device into a PC and copying the log files Windows applications are included to graph CTC100 log files and to convert them to various ASCII text formats Computer communications Each of the CTC100 s front panel controls has a corresponding text command that can be sent over USB Ethernet and either RS 232 or an optional GPIB interface When the USB interface is used the CTC100 appears on the computer as a standard COM port and can be controlled by any software that is compatible with an RS 232 port Eight digital I O lines are also provided these can interact with user programs to control most aspects of the instrument s operation User programs User programs macros consisting of one or more remote commands can be uploaded to the CTC100 either by sending them through one of the communications ports or by saving them as text files on a USB memory device and then plugging the device into the CTC100 Macros can be started or stopped and their progress monitored from the front panel Macros can call other macros and conditional statements and loops are supported Using the CTC100 s virtual channels values calculated by macros can be plotted on screen saved to logs and or used as inputs for feedback loops Up to 10 macros can run concurrently
46. automatically recalled whenever the ramp temperature Channel PID RampT which is usually the same as the feedback setpoint enters one of the temperature zones Any changes to P I D or the input sensor are automatically reflected in the zone definition for the current zone All eight PID zones can be viewed as a table on the front panel see the description of the Zone button on page 66 If you don t already know the feedback parameters to be loaded into the table it s usually easier to use the front panel rather than remote commands to determine the correct parameters and load them into the table However if the feedback parameters are already known they can be loaded into the table with a macro such as the following Out1 PID Zone 1 select the first line of the table and disable zoned feedback Outl PID Tmin 25 fill in the first line of the table Outl PID P 1 5 Out1 PID I 0 13 Out1 PID D 0 04 Outl PID Input Inl Out1 PID Zone 2 select the second line of the table Out1 PID Tmin 35 Out1 PID P 0 75 Outl PID r 0 05 Outl PID D 0 03 Outl PID Input In3 Outl PID Zone 3 select the third line of the tabl Out1 PID Tmin 1000 ensure that this line is never used Out1 PID Zone Auto enable zoned feedback Errors Attempting to change the zone when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error Channel Tune submenu See the Automatic PID Tuning section of this manual
47. be minimized To achieve 1 mK stability it s often necessary to enclose the temperature controlled system within a larger chamber that s also temperature controlled To control a temperature the CTC100 must be connected to a temperature sensor that measures the temperature in question and to a heater or cooler that raises or lowers the temperature when power is applied Although the heater cooler will just be called a heater in this discussion the following principles apply whether it is a resistive heater a thermoelectric heating cooling device or a cooling only device such as a fan The CTC100 supplies a varying current voltage or power to the heater and assumes that the measured temperature will increase or decrease in a roughly linear fashion with this output signal It is also assumed that the measured temperature depends not only on the CTC100 s output but also on external factors that vary unpredictably such as for example the ambient room temperature Therefore to maintain a consistent temperature the heater power has to be determined by an algorithm that can monitor a temperature T and continually adjust its heater output Y with the goal of keeping the temperature at a predetermined setpoint even as outside factors change the amount of heater output required to maintain that temperature In the CTC100 as in most other temperature controllers the algorithm used is PID feedback which is actually a combination of th
48. channel measures whatever value is present and does not produce an output it becomes a high impedance input If the IO type is Set out or Meas out the channel outputs either voltage current or power depending on the Channe1 Units setting If set out is selected the CTC100 just displays whatever output was most recently requested by the PID feedback loop remote interface or front panel If Meas out is selected the displayed value is an ADC reading of the output Errors If a channel s direction cannot be changed due to hardware limitations attempting to set its IO type generates a run time locked parameter error Channel Logging Off 0 1 s 0 3 s 3 s 10 s 30 s 1 min 3 min 10 min 30 min 1 hr Default Sets the log interval for this channel Default makes this channel s log interval the same as the global default interval see the System Log Interval instruction Off disables logging for this channel CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 97 ASRS Channel Lopass Off 1 s 3 s 10 s 30 s 100 s 300 s Input channels only Sets the time constant for the lowpass filter Input channels can be filtered with a 6th order lowpass RC filter to remove noise If enabled the filter removes noise spikes and other transient signals that last for less than the selected time constant The disadvantage is that the response speed of the
49. define Hello print Hello world pause 1 second 3 The macro Hello can now be run by issuing the remote command Hello Like all instruction arguments the macro content must be 256 or fewer characters in length To define a macro longer than 256 characters instead of using the define instruction save the macro on a USB memory device First use a text editor on a PC to compose the macro and save it as a text file The name of the text file should be the name of the macro plus the extension txt Copy the text file to a folder named macros in the root directory of a USB memory device and then plug the USB device into the CTC100 The macro should now be available for use as long as the USB device is plugged in Errors If the macro name is longer than 32 characters it is truncated to 32 characters If the macro content is longer than 256 characters it is truncated to 256 characters define does not check the contents of the macro for syntax errors CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 90 SRS delete Macro name delete all Deletes a saved macro Delete a11 deletes all macros saved in the CTC100 s internal memory but does not delete macros stored on attached USB devices Deleting a macro has no effect on currently running macros geterror If verbose mode is set to Low error messages generated by remote commands are not transmitted over the remote interface Instead they
50. eese 76 Concurrent MACOS xs m 76 MACHO NAMES 77 Command syntaxe muet LRL NLIS 77 Remote instructions eerie sees eene teen eee nne ttn sets setas setas setas setas setas setas setas setas 83 Miscell neg s vg ugVreio o E 83 IEEE 488 2 Instructions o rne EE RARA AR ARRA AARNO 85 Brosram Menuen e cr LI LAM EIU UE 89 SY SECIS OCU Pc diee einn Un UR RUE UE 92 ica 95 Error COES EE 105 Startup MACOS iiion naa R R RR a A R RG 106 Sample MacrOS ssssssssssisssssissssssssssessssssisssss ssoss sss sssssis oss ss essssssssssssss ossss s ss s sses 107 Temperature profiles ni on nenun o a a RRR AR RO ARAARA RRR 107 Control a feedback setpoint with an analog input eee 108 Show channels with tripped alarms on the Numeric screen sse 108 Show the PID setpoint in a virtual channel sse 109 Linearizing outputs when interfacing with external power supplies 109 Control instrument functions with the digital IO lines seeeen 109 Drive a solid state relay with the digital IO lines seen 110 PC applications 115 Ia peld euni x 116 FileGrapher 118 File MOMU ET ER 118 Edit MENU rerne EE E ESEN ETERA ETETE E ENEEIER TE 118 Processen ste rr t
51. filter If channel B is valid the value of channel A is replaced with the difference between channel A and channel B e g A B If channel B does not exist the difference feature is disabled and channel A s output reverts to its normal value Channel A must be an input Examples Inl diff In 2 Replaces the output of channel In 1 with the value In 1 In 2 Channel In 2 is unaffected Inl ditt Removes the differencing function from channel In 1 Channels that have their difference filter enabled can be used as the input for PID feedback loops in which case the feedback maintains a constant temperature differential between two locations rather than a constant absolute temperature Errors if channel A is not an input a not a valid instruction error is produced at assembly time ChannelA Follow Channel B Virtual channels only This instruction is only available for virtual channels channels V1 V2 and V3 with an IO type of Input If Channel B is a valid channel name the value of the virtual channel is updated with the value of Channel B each time an ADC conversion occurs To exit follow mode issue the Channel Follow instruction with an empty argument Channel IOtype Input Set out Meas out Output channels only This instruction which is only available for output channels determines the channel s direction Not all options are available for every output channel If the IO type is set to Input the
52. into a directory named macros on the root directory of the USB drive Plug the USB device into the CTC100 and wait until a window that says Opening USB drive appears and then disappears N o2 Press the System key on the CTC100 s front panel If less than five other macros are defined there should be a button labeled Update in the leftmost column Press the Update button 4 The CTC100 erases the existing firmware and then loads the new firmware The entire process should take about 20 30 seconds Ca At this point the old firmware is still running Turn the CTC100 off and back on again to start using the new firmware I O card firmware updates 1 The firmware update package supplied by SRS contains firmware files with names that end in hex plus macro files named U1 txt U2 txt etc Copy the hex files to the root directory of a USB flash drive or hard drive Copy the txt files into a directory named macros on the root directory of the USB drive Plug the USB device into the CTC100 and wait until a window that says Opening USB drive appears and then disappears N w Press the System key on the CTC100 s front panel If there aren t too many other macros defined there should be buttons labeled U1 U2 etc in the leftmost column If the buttons are not visible because other macros are occupying the column Press button U1 to update the firmware of the I O card in slot
53. is set and so on The Alarm Status Register is part of the GPIB status reporting system see the IEEE488 commands section for more information Errors attempting to change the value of the mask produces a run time locked parameter error Channel alarm mode Off Level Rate s Enables or disables the alarm The alarm can be programmed to trigger either when the level of the signal or its rate of change exceeds the thresholds The rate of change is calculated over two successive A D conversions and is therefore susceptible to noise if necessary use the channel s lowpass filter to reduce noise Channel alarm mute True False Turns off the alarm sound Has no effect on the alarm relay The alarm stays muted until the alarm condition disappears Channel alarm output channel name Associates an output channel with the alarm This output is shut off whenever the alarm is triggered that is the output is set to zero and its feedback loop if any is disabled Once the alarm status returns to Off the output returns to its previous value and the feedback loop resumes if it was running to begin with This feature can protect equipment from the excessive temperatures that can occur if a PID feedback loop is poorly tuned To turn this feature off issue the alarm output command with an empty argument i e Inl alarm output Channel alarm relay None A B C D An alarm can trigger one of the CTC100 s four relays The alarm
54. left of the Y axis You can also drag the plot left or right to see older or newer data the words X lock appear in the bottom left corner of the screen to indicate that the graph is no longer automatically scrolling to show new data Touch the X lock indicator to return to viewing real time data Test the outputs Before trying to run a PID feedback loop for the first time it s helpful to verify that your heater is working by setting its current or power to a low value and seeing if any current flows To do this connect your heater to the CTC100 s back panel and set the output as follows 1 Enable the outputs by pressing the Output Enable key twice The red Output Enable light should turn on 2 Select the appropriate output channel on the Select screen then press the Channel key to display the channel setup screen 3 Touch the Value button and enter a small value for the current or power one that won t damage your system 4 The Value button should display the value that you entered If it s blank or displays zero the CTC100 is not detecting the heater 5 Use a temperature sensor to verify that your heater is warming up 6 To turn the current off touch the Off button on the channel setup screen If the heater doesn t start warming up try the following Verify that the heater leads are not shorted to ground or to each other e Measure the heater resistance with a multimeter and make sure that it s between 100 and about
55. may not finish running the first program before beginning the second However the first program sent will always begin running before the second program If it s necessary to run programs sequentially begin each line with the PHO port holdoff instruction See the remote interface section of this manual for more details Preparing programs as files on USB memory devices The CTC100 can also read programs that are stored as text files a USB memory device This is the easiest way to import longer programs Create a Programs folder in the root directory of the memory device Type the program in a word processing or text editor program and save it as a txt file in the Programs folder Plug the memory device into the CTC100 To verify that the program is available look for its name in the Macros column of the System Setup screen The program can be run just as if it were saved in the CTC100 s memory however after the USB device is unplugged the program is no longer available Programs that are prepared as files can contain up to 4096 characters Unlike programs sent over communications ports programs in the form of text files can have more than one line all extra whitespace is ignored The program can also contain comments an apostrophe i e a single quote mark indicates that the rest of the line is a comment CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 48 SRS Preparing programs from the front panel Command
56. monitored by sending the remote command System display T PCB Show and restarting the CTC100 Hardware faults The CTC100 can detect certain unsafe operating conditions If such a condition occurs and persists for more than 2 seconds the CTC100 s output is shut down to re enable it disable and then re enable all outputs by pressing the Output Enable key three times In addition one of the following error messages appears in a pop up window on the CTC100 s screen CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 7 Measured heater current differs from desired value The CTC100 s output is non zero and the current flowing out of the positive terminal differs from the desired current by more than 0 25A This error can occur if the CTC100 is out of calibration It can also mean that the CTC100 has been damaged and is no longer capable of correctly regulating its output current or of producing its rated output current Current at and heater terminals is different The CTC100 s output is non zero and the current flowing out of the card s positive terminal is not the same as the current flowing into the negative terminal This error can occur if one of the leads is shorted to an external ground Output is off but heater current was detected The CTC100 s output is set to zero but current is flowing into the negative terminal This error may indicate that the heater is shorted to a power source other than the CTC100
57. on state The Relays value shown on the front panel does not change when the polarity is changed This value is the sum of four individual relay values relay A can have a value of 0 or 1 relay B can have a value of 0 or 2 relay C can have a value of 0 or 4 and relay D can have a value of 0 or 8 The meaning of these values depends on the Polarity setting as shown in the table below Default Relay value Remy value Relay state gt f 20 1 2 4 or8 power off alarm off alarm on Back panel pin gt NC NO NC NO NC NO Polarity 0 Closed Open Closed Open Open Closed Polarity Closed Open Open Closed Closed Open The default state is what the relays revert to when the CTC100 is switched off If no alarms are configured they will stay in that state when the CTC100 is turned back on again SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 70 SRS Setup screen for virtual channels Depending on their IO type setting the virtual channels V1 V2 and V3 have the same front panel settings as either the sensor input or the heater output channels These settings have been described above Virtual channels don t offer built in sensor calibration curves but they do accept custom calibration tables When configured as an output virtual channels also offer a cascade control setting IO type Channel IOType Input Meas out Virtual channels can be inputs or outputs In either case it
58. onto the PTCFileConverter icon In this drag and drop mode the setup window is not displayed and the files are immediately converted using the most recently saved settings the Input folder or file setting is ignored Input folder or file Select the log file or files that you d like to convert If you select a directory when the Start button is pressed PTCFileConverter will convert all log files in the directory but not in its subdirectories and combine them into a single output file Files that do not contain any data empty log files or files that are not log files are ignored and do not appear in the output file Output file Ifa Text or HTML output format is selected this field determines the name of the output file If you do not specify a directory the output file will be saved in the same folder as the input file If you do not specify an extension txt or html will be appended to the file name when the file is saved If Binary output format is selected this field determines the output folder The output files are saved to this folder and have the same name as the input files The output folder must be different from the input folder Output format The converted data can be saved as a text file an HTML file or a binary file In all cases the output is a table with a timestamp column plus one column per channel and one line per sampling period Text files can be saved with a tab comma or space betw
59. or more commas spaces tabs and or newlines It s not actually necessary to put each calibration point on a separate line as shown above The displayed value must either increase or decrease monotonically throughout the table that is it must consistently increase or decrease throughout the entire file The value cannot change direction and the file cannot contain two displayed values that are the same Likewise the measured value must also increase or decrease monotonically However the displayed and measured values can go in opposite directions The calibration data must cover the entire expected range of measurements which in the example above is 0 to 100 C When readings fall outside the range of the calibration file no data appears on the display and any PID feedback loops that use the affected channel are frozen The order of the data points can be reversed putting the measured value first followed by the displayed value by adding a tilde to the beginning of the file The tilde must be the first character in the file appearing before the units declaration and any other header information Errors in calibration tables If the calibration file can t be read no readings appear for the affected channel This condition occurs if the file has any values after the header with no numeric characters if the values are not monotonically increasing or decreasing or if the file ends with an temperature value If a channel is renamed the
60. or off each time an ADC conversion occurs that is if 10 ADC conversions are occurring each second the LED blinks 5 times per second If the status LED does not blink while the CTC100 is running or does not blink at the same rate as the status LEDs on the other I O cards the card has a hardware or software problem I O cards are calibrated at the factory and the microcontroller s built in EEPROM holds the card s calibration data Input cards produce calibrated readings in the native units of the sensor for example the RTD card provides calibrated resistance readings while the thermocouple provides calibrated voltage readings The CPU card converts these readings to temperatures using calibration data for the particular sensor Output cards provide calibrated outputs in watts The microcontroller is interfaced to the backplane bus with a transceiver U120 An RS 232 port is available but only used for debugging The backplane bus uses a proprietary synchronous communication protocol The CPU U102 is a Motorola ColdFire running at 90 MHz The ColdFire s 32 bit data bus is directly connected to 16 MB of SDRAM U201 and to an expansion connector J202 used for the GPIB option All remaining bus components only use the upper 16 data bits and are connected to the CPU through a set of transceivers U520 U530 U540 to avoid overloading the ColdFire s bus drivers which can drive a maximum of 50 pF A 4 MB flash chip U202 stores the CTC100 s s
61. other channels are deselected The macro is best used with the Numeric screen visible but also works with the Select or Plot screens if group 1 selectAlarmed pause 1 s j l SRS CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 109 Show the PID setpoint in a virtual channel Virtual input channels have a follow control that can be used to make the channel echo the value of any other channel With a macro the virtual channel can also be made to echo any CTC100 parameter not just channel values The following macro uses a virtual channel to echo a feedback setpoint This macro makes it possible for example to graph the setpoint on the Plot screen alongside other variables or using the Diff button to graph the difference between the setpoint and the actual temperature waitForSample V1 Out1 PID rampT 1 Each time an ADC conversion occurs this macro sets channel V1 to the setpoint of channel Out 1 if the setpoint is ramping toward a given value Out1 PID rampT returns the current value of the ramp while Out1 PID setpoint returns the endpoint of the ramp Because the macro is contained within a 1 statement it repeats indefinitely running as a background task Using the diff function of channel V1 the difference between the actual temperature and the feedback setpoint can be plotted This can be helpful for monitoring the accuracy of setpoint ramps Linearizing outputs when interfac
62. reading can t be changed by typing in a new value so the button is greyed out Sensor Channel Sensor Diode ROX RTD Therm Touch this button to select a sensor class Four options are available diode ROX ruthenium oxide RTD and thermistor This setting controls how the sensor input hardware reads the input signal It determines the excitation current whether the CTC100 reads the sensor voltage or resistance and the list of calibration options available in the Cal column The Diode option sets the sensor excitation current to 10 pA and causes the hardware to read the voltage across the sensor The ROX Thermistor or RTD option causes the hardware to read the sensor resistance The ROX and thermistor modes are identical except for the list of calibration options The RTD mode results in a larger sensor excitation current and therefore lower noise and places an RTD specific list of calibration options in the Cal column Range Channel Range 106 306 1008 3006 1k 3k 10k 30k 100k 300k 2 5V Auto Sets the sensor measurement range The default range is Auto In general a lower range results in a larger excitation current less noise and more accurate measurements The range should be manually set if it is critical to limit sensor self heating otherwise the CTC100 may change the range and excitation current at unexpected times The CTC100 uses ASCII character 234 for the Ohms symbol To type this chara
63. removing the USB device touch the USB logging indicator again and wait for it to turn dark blue This very important step is needed to prevent damage to the USB device If this step is skipped e g if a power failure occurs while logging the USB device should be re formatted with a PC before using it again View saved data on a Windows PC Once data has been logged to the USB memory stick the stick will contain one or more log files for each channel Each file has the same name as a CTC100 channel plus the extension ptc the files use the same format as the PTC10 temperature controller If the ptc file gets too big a new log file with a numeric extension such as 000 001 etc is opened By default the log files are located in the root directory of the USB device A software package available at no charge from the SRS website www thinksrs com click Downloads gt Software includes a FileGrapher program that displays graphs of CTC100 log files and a PTCFileConverter program that converts log files to ASCII text files readable by most other programs To use FileGrapher either double click its icon or drag a log file onto the icon To use PTCFileConverter double click the icon to modify the conversion options and or select files to convert or just drag one or more log files onto the icon to convert them with the current options computer The System setup menu which can be displayed by pressing the Setup button on the
64. s controls during tuning tuning will continue unless you cancel it by setting the tuning mode to off or by disabling the outputs with the Output Enable key In fact it s a good idea to display a graph of heater output and temperature while autotuning select the two channels press the Show Data key and select the Multiple tab To see the status message again press the Setup key select the tab for the output channel and then touch the Status button in the bottom right corner When tuning is finished the CTC100 beeps and the PID feedback is automatically enabled If the temperature is still below the setpoint the CTC100 starts increasing power to the heater The temperature may overshoot the setpoint but should eventually stabilize at the setpoint Since the optimum PID parameters usually vary with temperature it may be helpful to re tune once the setpoint has been reached CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 22 Acquiring and logging data Input filters The CTC100 has several numeric filters for processing sensor readings Except for the sensor calibration the filters are disabled by default and can be enabled by the user In the order in which they are applied the filters are 1 Sensor calibration converts sensor reading in ohms volts etc to temperature 2 Follow filter virtual channels only makes the value equal to another channel 3 Offset gain multiplies a channel by a gain and adds an off
65. settle to its new value d dt Channel d dt Off On When this control is set to On the value of the selected channel is replaced with its rate of change i e the difference between the previous ADC reading and the current reading divided by the time between the two readings Since the derivative is normally somewhat noisy the lowpass filter should be enabled when the derivative filter is used Setup screen for channels In In 4 Alarm column Each input channel has an alarm If enabled the alarm is triggered if any of the following conditions occur The input or its rate of change exceeds the user specified minimum and maximum values The input exceeds the measurement range of the I O card The sensor is disconnected except on analog I O channels which cannot detect disconnected sensors When an alarm is triggered it can do any of the following Play a sound Triggera relay on the digital I O card Shut off an output channel The alarm can be programmed to remain triggered until it is manually shut off latching alarm or to shut itself off as soon as the input returns to a value within the alarm limits non latching alarm The alarm can also be programmed to ignore momentary glitches To determine which alarms are currently triggered look at the Select screen A small white dot in the upper right corner of a button indicates that the channel s alarm is in the triggered state It s very important to s
66. the installation is complete the CTC100 should appear as a COM port on your computer and your programs can use the USB connection in the same way that they use an RS 232 connection Read data from the CTCI00 All RS 232 GPIB USB and Ethernet messages sent to the CTC100 must end with a linefeed decimal 10 hex 0x0a n The CTC100 will not process the message until the linefeed is received Instructions are not case sensitive The most recent value i e the value read at the most recent ADC conversion of a single channel can be queried by sending the name of the channel followed by a question mark Omit any spaces from the channel s name For example to query the value of channel Out 1 send the command Out 1 The CTC100 replies with a value such as 0 00000 Out1 0 00000 The most recent value of all channels can be retrieved with a single get Output instruction the question mark is optional in this case getOutput 29 98424 25 86019 27 49236 NaN NaN NaN 0 000000 10 04576 10 04574 10 04572 NaN NaN NaN 0 0 Sensors that are disconnected or out of range report a value of NaN not a number To determine the order in which the channels are listed send a getOutputNames query getOutputNames In 1 In 3 In 2 In 4 Out 1 Out 2 AIO 1 AIO 2 AIO 3 AIO 4 Vl V2 V3 DIO Relays Data can also be read with the get Log instruction which returns logged data Logged values are typically th
67. the system doesn t experience any temperature disturbances during the tuning process Since the ideal feedback parameters usually vary with temperature run the tuning algorithm at about the temperature at which the feedback will be used If the system has never been tuned before you may need to tune at room temperature then let the feedback bring the system to its working temperature and re tune at the working temperature The autotuning algorithm assumes that the temperature is a linear function of heater power In most cases it isn t which means that the results produced by the algorithm may not be perfectly accurate and may need to be manually adjusted Using alarms with PID feedback loops SRS By default the PID heater output is frozen whenever the sensor becomes disconnected or goes out of range In some cases this can lead to uncontrolled heating or cooling of the sample For example if the feedback setpoint is set to 200 degrees but the sensor can only measure temperatures as high as 100 degrees the CTC100 will continue heating the sample indefinitely Each input channel has an alarm that can be used to prevent such runaway heating When properly configured alarms set the heater output to zero whenever the sensor is disconnected out of range or the temperature exceeds limits that you specify Alarms should be set up whenever the heater is capable of providing enough heat to damage your system CTC100 Programmable Temperature
68. type the relay tuner always tunes more aggressively than the step response tuner See Aggressive moderate and conservative tuning on page 35 for more information Setup screen for analog I O and digital I O channels Depending on their IO type setting the general purpose analog and digital I O channels have the same front panel settings as either the sensor input or the heater output channels These settings have been described above The general purpose channels don t offer built in sensor calibration curves but they do accept custom calibration tables IO type Channel IOType Input Set out Meas out The analog and digital I O channels can be inputs or outputs Two output types are available if Set out is selected the desired output is shown while if Meas out is selected the actual output is measured and the measured value is reported PID feedback functionality is only available if the channel is an output while alarm and calibration functions are only available if the channel is an input Polarity Channel Polarity 0 1 This setting only applies to the Relays channel on the digital I O card Changing the polarity reverses the state of all four relays The Polarity setting ensures that the relays are in an acceptable state when the CTC100 is switched off When the Polarity is 0 the relays revert to the alarm off state when the CTC100 is switched off When the Polarity is 1 they revert to the alarm
69. which of the currently plotted buffers you d like to apply the operation to Add buffer Adds two buffers together You re asked to select two buffers from among the buffers that are currently plotted the buffer to be modified buffer 1 and the buffer to add buffer 2 When you click Apply or OK each point in buffer 1 is added to the first point in buffer 2 that has a time equal to or greater than the time of the point in buffer 1 CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 121 ASRS Subtract buffer Subtracts one buffer from another Multiply by buffer Multiplies two buffers together Divide by buffer Divides one buffer by another Add constant Adds a constant to each point in a buffer You re asked to select one of the currently plotted buffers and to provide a numeric value When you click Apply or OK the value is added to each point in the selected buffer Subtract constant Subtracts a constant from each point in a buffer Multiply by constant Multiplies each point in a buffer by a constant Divide by constant Divides each point in a buffer by a constant Kelvin to Celsius Assuming the contents of a buffer are expressed in Kelvins converts the data to C Celsius to Kelvin Assuming the contents of a buffer are expressed in C converts the data to Kelvins Celsius to Fahrenheit Assuming the contents of a buffer are expressed in C converts the data to F
70. 0 0 Errors If part of the specified subnet mask is not in the correct format i e contains a non numeric character or a value that is not between 0 and 255 that portion of the mask is set to zero The subnet cannot be changed if system IP DHCP is on system IP Telnet 23 Sets the telnet port for Ethernet communications Remote commands can be sent to the CTC via a telnet connection on the selected port The port must be a value between 0 and 65535 inclusive and should normally be set to either 23 the default or a value greater than 1024 system log clear yes no Erases log files from the USB device CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 94 system log clear yes erases all log files from the current folder on the USB device e system log clear no has no effect system log clear always returns no system log folder Folder name Determines which folder on the USB memory device receives the CTC100 s logged data If the folder does not exist it is created If the folder does exist and it already contains CTC100 logfiles new data points are appended to the existing files system log interval off 0 1 s 0 3 s 1 s 3 s 10 s 30 sS 1 min 3 min 10 min 30 min 1 hr Sets the default log interval which determines how often each channel s value is written to the log Individual channels can override this value using the channe1 10gging instruction system log Log t
71. 0 kO 5 pA 100 nA 300 kQ 5 pA 30 nA 2 5 MO pA pA 2 5 V 10 pA Excitation current produced by the CTC 00 The amount of power dissipated in an RTD is at most 400 uW at the 1000 range decreasing to 2 5 uW at the 2 5 MO range The power dissipation in a thermistor is at most 10 uW at the 100 range decreasing to 300 pW at the 300 kO range Thermistor power dissipation decreases much more rapidly than RTDs as the measurement range is increased Low power dissipation at high resistances is critical for thermistors used in cryogenic systems since the resistance of the sensor increases and the heat conductivity of the surrounding medium decreases as the temperature approaches 0 K CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 6 The direction of the excitation current can be set by the user to forward reverse or AC switching between forward and reverse with each sample AC current is recommended for resistive sensors to reduce noise and drift AC current cannot be used with diode sensors See the discussion of the Current setting on page 58 100W heater outputs SRS The CTC100 has two outputs for resistive heaters The output connectors are 6 32 wire clamp screws and will accept bare wire between 12 and 22 AWG For the most reliable connection it is recommended to crimp a 6 insulated spade terminal such as TE Connectivity 34080 for 16 22 AWG wires or 35559 for 14 16 AWG wires to the end of each heater wire A crim
72. 00 s front panel display A new record is created when the user does one of the following enables USB logging changes the log interval the time between data points sets the system time or plugs in a sensor or heater after it has been unplugged for more than 100 log points in which case no data points are logged while the sensor is unplugged Not a number values 0x7fc00000 if the binary data is interpreted as an integer are recorded if the sensor is out of range or if the sensor or heater is unplugged for less than 100 log points If the sensor or heater is unplugged for more than 100 log points no values are recorded and a new record is created the next time a sensor or heater is plugged in By default log files are given the name of the channel followed by the extension PTC i e Out 1 PTC If the file has more than 256 records or the file size reaches 2 GB the file is closed and a new log file with a numeric extension ChannelName 000 ChannelName 001 etc is created If numeric extension 999 is reached data for the channel is no longer logged A description of the file and record structure follows All values are little endian CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 27 SRS File header Bytes 0 3 Format identifier 4 ASCII bytes PTCO equivalent to the 4 byte unsigned integer 0x50544330 Bytes 4 7 File format version number The version number is always 1 Any other number i
73. 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00604 5 00604 5 00604 5 00604 5 00604 5 00604 5 00604 5 00604 5 00471 5 00601 5 00604 5 00604 5 00604 5 00604 5 00604 5 00471 5 00601 5 004771 5 00601 5 00604 5 00601 5 00369 5 00369 5 00604 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00366 5 00366 5 00601 5 00299 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 10U T16 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 10U T16 0 1UF 16V X7R 10U T16 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 01UF 16V 0 1UF 16V X7R 33P 33P 0 01UF 16V 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 18P 18P 0 1UF 16V X7R Iu SMD TANTALUM C Case SMD TANTALUM C Case SMD TANTALUM
74. 04 0 00238 0 00288 0 00315 0 00328 0 00329 0 00371 0 00457 0 00517 0 00525 0 00901 0 00978 0 01013 0 01014 0 01212 0 01226 0 01227 0 01228 0 01246 0 01320 0 01323 0 01324 0 01325 0 01327 0 01329 1 00340 1 00472 1 00496 1 01093 1 01182 1 01183 1 01187 1 01252 2 00068 6 00076 6 01012 6 01013 6 01014 7 00122 7 01002 7 01286 7 02180 7 02181 7 02182 7 02184 7 02185 Parts List 6 32 KEP 4 40X3 16 M F 16 18 4 40X1 4PF FAN GUARD 6 32X1 2RP RIGHT FOOT LEFT FOOT 6 32X3 8PP REAR FOOT 6 32X1 4PF 7 24 6 32X7 16 PP 8 18 RED 8 18 BLACK 4 40X3 16PF 6 32X1 4PP LW BINDING POST 8 1 4 18 0 25 M4 X 6MM 18GREEN W YELL 4GREEN W YELL 6 32X1 4 BLACK 16 BROWN 36151 696366 1 51864 37CFM 24V 74 IFHS 10EAS1 4 40 3 520412 2 10 32 x 1 4 TR 10 COND DIL 13 2 PIN 24AWG WH 6 POS 18GA ORNG 3 PIN 640441 3 3 PIN 43375 0001 60 COND 050R33 075B RC1083BBLKBLKFF 2 SPKR 24V 240W 5TT 4 R 34 312 BAIL IGC BEZEL IGC RCK SHELF CTC100 CHASSIS CTC100 F P CTC100 LEXAN CTC100 M B BRKT CTC100 BRKT P S Kep nuts for fan Black hex head screws for RS 232 and DIO connectors Wire Mounting screws for front panel and power supply Mounting screws for backplane bracket Screws for front feet Backplane mounting screws Wire Screws for rear feet Wire Wire Bezel mounting screws Speaker and backplane mounting screws Ground lug Wire Ring terminal for ground lug
75. 06 Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 0 1 5ppm Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 0 1 5ppm Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 146 RN202 4 00916 47X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN203 4 00916 47X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN500 4 00916 47X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN501 4 00916 47X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN502 4 00916 47X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN503 4 00916 47X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny R631 4 01117 1 00K Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF R731 4 01117 1 00K Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF R632 4 01309 100K Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF R732 4 01309 100K Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF R112 4 01466 300 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT RN111 4 01707 47KX4D RN112 4 01707 47KX4D RN121 4 01707 47KX4D R430 4 01733 604 Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 0 196 5ppm R438 4 01733 604 Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 0 196 5ppm R113 4 018
76. 0H 30k 100k 300k 1M Custom Thermistor sensor type Channel cal Type DT 470 DT 670 Si410 Si430 Si440 S700 S800 S900 Custom Diode sensor type Channel cal Type RX 102A RX 103A RX 202A RO600 R400 R500 ROX sensor type Channel cal Type Custom Standard Channels with custom calibration tables Determines which calibration curve is used for a particular channel The available arguments depend on the value of the channel Sensor setting See the description of the Type button on page 61 for more information Channel PID submenu All channe1 PID instructions are only available for output channels Attempting to apply a PID instruction to an input channel results in a not a valid instruction error By default each PID loop has no assigned input channel In this state all PID settings are locked except for channel PID input lfa macro attempts to change the setpoint the feedback gains etc a locked setting error is generated and the macro continues to run An error message is only printed if Verbose is set to High Channel PID D 0 0 Channel PID I 0 0 Channel PID P 0 0 These instructions set the PID gain factors The PID equation is CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 102 SRS Output Pe O 5IT eo ei e1 e ec t ec ea t e D T er ea where P I and D are the derivative gains e is the error the difference between the setpoint and t
77. 1 If a TRG remote command was previously received re enables automatic A D conversions Hides the internal temperature display T PCB Ports Closes all I O ports and re opens them USB and Telnet connections will be lost The port settings baud rate IP address etc remain unchanged Port settings Resets all I O port settings to their factory defaults Channels Resets the settings on the Channel menu for all channels to their factory defaults Also sets the A D rate to 100 ms Log Resets the default log rate to 1 second sets the log rate for each channel to the default global value and enables automatic logging to USB If a USB storage device is attached erases log files in the root directory and begins logging to USB ALL resets all of the above items system other Volume off 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 max Controls the volume of all tones and alarm sounds played through the CTC100 s speaker Channel 0 0 To change the value of an output channel send the channel s name followed by a floating point value Regardless of the channel s direction channe1 returns the current value of the channel This instruction is identical to channel value For example Outl 2 5 sets the value of channel Out 1 to 2 5 W if Output Enable is on Out1 Queries the value of channel Out1 Errors a run time error occurs if this instruction is used to set the value of an input channel If the a channel has an enabled feedback loop its
78. 1 5 00601 C202 5 00601 C203 5 00601 C204 5 00601 C205 5 00601 C206 5 00601 C207 5 00601 C208 5 00601 C209 5 00601 C210 5 00601 C211 5 00601 C212 5 00601 C213 5 00601 C215 5 00601 C216 5 00601 C218 5 00601 C302 5 00601 C303 5 00601 SRS CTC100 BOT COVE CTC100 CPU BRKT CTC100 DISPLAY CTC100 TOP COVE CTC100 COVER TOUCH PANEL LCD DISPLAY GENERIC 1065 CR2032 W OUT PN 1U T35 0 1UF 16V X7R 10U T16 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 1500P 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R Bottom cover CPU card angle bracket Paper spacer goes between LCD display and front panel PCB Top cover Cover for GPIB cutout with RS 232 connector mount Touch sensitive overlay for LCD display QVGA display Serial number label Battery Battery holder SMD TANTALUM A Case NOTE NEEDS POLARITY SMD TANTALUM C Case CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 137 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5
79. 100 provides connection to the power source and to a protective ground Power cord The CTC100 package includes a detachable three wire power cord for connection to the power source and protective ground The exposed metal parts of the box are connected to the power ground to protect against electrical shock Always use an outlet which has a properly connected protective ground Consult with an electrician if necessary Grounding A chassis grounding lug is available on the back panel of the CTC100 Connect a heavy duty ground wire 12AWG or larger from the chassis ground lug directly to a facility earth ground to provide additional protection against electrical shock Line fuse Use a 10 A 250 V 3AB Slo Blo fuse Operate only with covers in place To avoid personal injury do not remove the product covers or panels Do not operate the product without all covers and panels in place Serviceable parts The CTC100 does not include any user serviceable parts inside Refer service to a qualified technician SRS CTC 00 Programmable Temperature Controller Specifications Specifications vii CTCI00 temperature controller Minimum sampling rate Maximum sampling rate Data logging rate Display resolution PID feedback auto tuning Display Alarms Computer interface Power Dimensions Weight Warranty 1 Hz 50 or 60 Hz depending on AC line frequency 10 samples second channel 1 sample hour channel can be set indep
80. 11 A1 V1 and V1 as described below Cable shields should be connected to chassis ground at pin 3 of either connector The I and I pins provide an excitation current that should be routed to the temperature sensor through two wires preferably a shielded twisted pair The excitation current produces a voltage across the sensor that is measured with pins V and V These pins should be connected to the sensor with two additional wires preferably a second shielded twisted pair as shown in the figure below V should be connected to I as close as possible to the temperature sensor and likewise I should be connected to V as close as possible to the sensor Because essentially no current flows through the V leads they accurately transmit the sensor voltage to the CTC100 Using four wires instead of two ensures that the CTC100 measures the resistance of the sensor and not the wires going to the sensor TV V Sensor l The V and V pins are internally connected to the I and I pins with 1 MO resistors so the sensor will still work if the V and V pins are not connected However the reading is more accurate when all four pins are connected Four wire sensors usually have two wires of one color attached to one side of the RTD and two of a second color attached to the other side In this case the RTD should be wired to the CTC100 in one of the following two ways assuming the leads are white and black v l Ground V
81. 16 4 00139 4 00139 4 00442 4 00442 4 00678 4 00678 4 00909 4 00909 4 00909 4 00909 4 00910 4 00910 4 00911 4 00911 4 00911 4 00916 4 00916 Ww O9 O9 UJ O9 O29 O9 ww NO SO SO NO NO SO SO SO SO o N MBD1503A MBD1503A MBD1503A MBD1503A MBD1503A MBD1503A MBD1503A MBD1503A MBD1503A HCPL 2630 HCPL 2630 HCPL 2630 MMBZ5230 MMBZ5230 DG408DY DG408DY OPA2131UJ OPA2131UJ MAX6250BCSA MAX6250BCSA MAX6250BCSA EZEEZEZEZEEZE 74ABT16245CMTD LTC2440CGN LTC2440CGN MAX4635EUBT MAX4635EUBT MAX4635EUB MAX4635EUBt MAX4635EUBT MAX4635EUBT ATMEGA64 16AC LT6012ACSH PBF LT6012ACSH PBF MAX339CSE MAX339CSE MAX339CSE MAX339CSE MAX339CSE MAX339CSE 74HC238 7T4HC238 INA121UA INA121UA MAX4674ESE4 MAX4674ESE4 10K 10K 10 0M 10 0M 1 2K 1206 MINI 1 2K 1206 MINI 6 040K 6 040K 470X4D 470X4D 470X4D 470X4D 1 0KX4D 1 0KX4D 4 7KX4D 4 7KX4D 4 7KX4D 47X4D 47X4D 4 7V ZENER 5 4 7V ZENER 5 Analog mux 8 to 1 15V okay TTL compat Analog mux 8 to 1 15V okay TTL compat FET input dual opamp 4 MHz GBW FET input dual opamp 4 MHz GBW 5V Reference 5V Reference 5V Reference Quad unity stable opamp rail rail output Quad unity stable opamp rail rail output Pot Multi Turn Side Adjust Pot Multi Turn Side Adjust Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 1 5OPPM Resistor Metal Film 1 8W 1 5OPPM Network scalloped edge 1206 Network scalloped edge 12
82. 19 CTS Clear to Send A20 RTS Request to Send A21 RXD Receive Data A22 TXD Transmit Data The front panel connects to the same backplane bus as the I O cards An Atmel ATmegal62 microcontroller on the front panel PCB detects touchscreen touches and button presses controls the system fan generates sounds and manages the LCD power supplies All sounds are generated by the Atmel microcontroller and output as an 8 bit 60 kHz PWM signal The speaker driver amplifies this signal providing 250 mW of power to drive the speaker Touchscreen and button presses are detected by touchscreen controller U201 which is connected to the microcontroller with an SPI interface The Atmel microcontroller automatically plays click sounds and illuminates the front panel LEDs except for the Output Enable LED when the buttons or touchscreen are pressed The LCD display is illuminated by three strings of built in LEDs The LCD backlight supply has three independent constant current sources that each produce 62 5 mA of current to power one string of LEDs The BACKLIGHT ON signal is driven by one of the Atmel microcontroller s PWM outputs The LCD display can be dimmed by rapidly switching the backlight LEDs on and off The fan driver converts a PWM signal from the Atmel microcontroller into a constant current output The microcontroller can vary the fan speed by changing its PWM output The front panel has provisions for a fan tachometer that are curre
83. 1kO Higher resistances are acceptable but the heater may not get very hot Lower resistances may cause the CTC100 to overheat Display the heater resistance go to the System screen and in the Display column touch the Extras button and select Show Return to the Select screen Underneath the heater power there should now be buttons for heater current Out 1 I and Out 2 I voltage Out 1 V and resistance Out 1 R Turn the heater on again Is the heater resistance the same as what you measured with a multimeter Is the voltage pegged at 55V or the current at 2A Verify that the PID mode is set to off On the channel setup screen make sure that the output s hi limit and range are both greater that the output value that you entered Set the data logging rate SRS By default the CTC100 records one data point per second to each channel s log To change this rate for all channels press the Setup key on the front panel and then touch the blue System tab Under the Log column touch the Interval button and select from the list of available options The log interval only affects how often data is recorded it does not affect ADC sampling or PID feedback performance CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation I5 Each channel can be assigned its own data logging rate see the description of the Channel Logging control on page 65 Save data to and retrieve data from
84. 200 5 00378 180P Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 C201 5 00378 180P Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 C202 5 00378 180P Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 C203 5 00378 180P Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 C204 5 00378 180P Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 C205 5 00378 180P Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 C206 5 00378 180P Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 C207 5 00378 180P Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 C210 5 00299 AU Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C220 5 00299 AU Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C230 5 00299 AU Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C240 5 00299 AU Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C250 5 00299 AU Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C260 5 00299 AU Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C270 5 00299 AU Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C310 5 00299 AU Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C311 5 00319 10U T35 SMD TANTALUM D Case C312 5 00387 1000P Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 C313 5 00299 AU Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C314 5 00381 330P Capacitor Mono 50V 596 NPO 1206 C316 5 00519 33U T35 SMD TANTALUM Y Case C360 5 00513 1U 16V A CASE SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 154 C361 C362 C364 C410 C420 D111 D200 D202 D204 D206 D314 D315 D361 D362 D401 D403 D421 D422 D423 D424 15230 15240 18250 18260 jill J200 J400 JD121 K401 K402 K403 K404
85. 25CS MC7815ACD2T 78M05 74HC86AD 74HC04 PTC DIG I O BRK 4 40X3 16PP 4 40X3 16PP 563002B00000 1690520000 74HC595 8 Bit Shift Register w Latched 3 state Outputs 74HC541 Octal 3 State Buffer Line Driver Receiver 7815 3 Terminal 15V 1A Regulator 78M05 Quad XOR gate 74HC04 Hex Inverter Heat sink Relay connector CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Schematics 157 Schematics Circuit board Page count PTC21l CPU board 6 PTC222 Backplane PTC232 Front panel PTC240 GPIB card PTC323 2 channel thermistor diode RTD reader PTC431 100W DC output card PTC510 Analog IO card PTC520 Digital IO card 4 QU 00 WW SRS CTC 00 Programmable Temperature Controller
86. 3000 6 5000 6000 10000 B 10000 H 30 k 100 k 300 k 1 M Custom if Sensor Therm Channel Cal Type File Standard ifa custom calibration table is loaded The Calibration Type control determines which of the CTC100 s preloaded calibration tables is used to convert raw sensor readings to temperature values If a diode RTD or thermistor is in use the Type setting also has an option to produce a custom calibration table from user entered calibration coefficients Changing the sensor type has no effect on how the raw sensor reading is acquired for example it does not affect the channel s input range or excitation current If the selected channel uses a custom calibration table that was loaded from a file on a USB device its calibration type reads File To stop using the custom calibration touch the Type button and select Standard The Type button then reverts to the normal list of calibration types supported by the I O card To return to using the calibration file unplug the USB device with the file if it is still plugged in and then plug the device in again The available calibration types depend on the sensor type Diodes Choose from the list of commercial cryogenic diodes See the table on page 3 for more information on standard diode calibrations ROX Choose from the list of commercial ruthenium oxide sensors See the table on page 3 for more information on st
87. 380 1N5248 1N5248 18V 500mW DO 35 ZENER DIODE D221 3 00479 MUR410 MUR410 100V 4A ULTRA FAST DIODE D222 3 00479 MUR410 MUR410 100V 4A ULTRA FAST DIODE D223 3 00479 MUR410 MUR410 100V 4A ULTRA FAST DIODE D224 3 00479 MUR410 MUR410 100V 4A ULTRA FAST DIODE D225 3 00479 MUR410 MUR410 100V 4A ULTRA FAST DIODE D226 3 00479 MUR410 MUR410 100V 4A ULTRA FAST DIODE D227 3 00479 MUR410 MUR410 100V 4A ULTRA FAST DIODE D228 3 00479 MUR410 MUR410 100V 4A ULTRA FAST DIODE D231 3 00012 GREEN LED Rectangular 0 1 x 0 3 D232 3 00012 GREEN LED Rectangular 0 1 x0 3 D233 3 00012 GREEN LED Rectangular 0 1 x0 3 D234 3 00012 GREEN LED Rectangular 0 1 x0 3 D235 3 00012 GREEN LED Rectangular 1 x0 3 D236 3 00012 GREEN LED Rectangular 0 1 x 0 3 D241 3 01859 B540C 13 F D251 3 01859 B540C 13 F J100 01181 431602103 J106 00166 60 PIN DIL Header DIM Latching Clips J150 00251 10 PIN DIL Header DIM Locking Clips J160 00086 3 PINSI Header SIM J201 00111 6 PIN WHITE Header SIM Polarized J205 00260 4 PIN WHITE Header SIM Polarized J206 00250 2 PIN WHITE Header SIM Polarized J207 00471 4 PIN WHITE Header SIM Polarized J208 00471 4 PIN WHITE Header SIM Polarized J209 00250 2 PIN WHITE Header SIM Polarized J211 00006 2 PIN DI Header SIM J241 00006 2 PIN DI Header SIM J251 00006 2 PIN DI Header SIM JD100 00235 96 PIN VERTICAL 3 Row Vertical JD101 00235 96 PIN VER
88. 43 11 PM CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 117 ASRS e Milliseconds since 1970 is a single 64 bit decimal value that indicates how many milliseconds have elapsed since midnight on January 1 1970 Elapsed seconds Elapsed minutes Elapsed hours and Elapsed days record the time as a single floating point value that indicates how much time has elapsed since the first point in the log Resample Check the Resample box to downsample or upsample log files If Resample is checked PTCFileConverter either averages points together or duplicates points so that the log rate of the output file is the value in the Resample period field For example if the input log has one point per second and the Resample Period is set to 10 seconds checking the Resample box produces an output file in which each point is the average of 10 input points Gaps between logfile records see Log File Structure above are not resampled Therefore if the instrument was turned off in the middle of a log or a sensor was unplugged for more than 100 data points the gap in the log file remains even after resampling The resample feature is useful for reducing the number of data points in the output file Log files with a large number of data points can be cumbersome to display and often cannot be imported into application programs In addition different CTC channels can be logged at different i
89. 4x pause 1 s cycles through the while loop three times setting channel Out 1 to 1 then a second later to 2 and another second later to 3 The CTC100 s macro system does not support equations For example a statement of the form Hx y 2 is not allowed More generally each CTC100 argument can only contain a single term CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 82 SRS instruction A single instruction query with no arguments if preceded by a pound sign can be substituted for any numeric argument The instruction cannot contain quotes parentheses or spaces For example Out1 PID setpoint Out2 PID setpoint sets Out 1 s feedback setpoint equal to Out 2 s setpoint The CTC100 automatically appends a question mark to the argument resulting in the query Out2 PID setpoint and evaluates the resulting instruction at run time 1list Prints a comma separated list of variables that have been defined within the macro Macro name Macros can be defined with the define instruction by saving a macro from the Program screen or by plugging in a USB drive containing macros in the form of text files Once a macro has been defined it can be called by including its name in another macro the parent macro When the parent macro is assembled the macros it calls are expanded to their component instructions Up to six levels of macro calls are allowed Variables declared i
90. 50 pixel tall graph with no X axis labels above the current graph Add large header Adds a 100 pixel tall graph with no X axis labels above the current graph Remove headers Removes all graphs except for the bottom graph SRS CTC 00 Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 124 Command line and macro instructions SRS CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 125 Instruction add buffer 1 buffer2 addGraph b 350 addx buffer 0 0 alignAIl annotation annotation annotationPosition position antialias on off autoscale XY on off axisDivisions 4 4 break Pos Neg sourceBuffer resultBase cp n buffer buffer2 clearMark clearAllMarks clearPlot copy sourceBuffer destinationBuffer crop sourceBuffer destinationBuffer directory directoryName div buffer 1 buffer2 diva buffer divx buffer 1 0 drawMarks fontSize 10 hideMarks level buffer linewidth pga load buffer fileName lowpass buffer 1 0 markLevel buffer 1 0 1 0 median buffer moveMark 0 0 mpy buffer buffer2 mpyx buffer 0 0 norm buffer ASRS Description add two buffers buffer bufferl buffer2 add a new graph to the display specify height option b put new graph below current graph add constant buffer buffer constant align the start times of all buffers draws an annotation in the corner of the graph specified wit
91. 601 5 00299 5 00393 5 00601 5 00601 4 7KX4D 22X4 22X4 22X4 4 7KX4D 4 7KX4D 4 7KX4D 4 7KX4D 1 0KX4D 1 0KX4D 82X4D 82X4D 82X4D 82X4D 82X4D 82X4D 4 7KX4D 4 7KX4D 1 0KX4D 10KX4D 10KX4D 22X4 22X4 B3F 1052 MAX6365LKA31 MCF5307AI90B MT48LC4M32B2TG7 SST39VF3201 70 CY62146EV30LL DS1672S 33 74LCX04M 74LCX16245MTD 74LCX16245MTD D13706F00A100 AX88796L SPGAL22V10AV 74V CX16245MTD 74V CX16245MTD 74V CX16245MTD ISP1161A1BM 74HCO08 TPS2042BD 45MHZ SMT 32 768KHZ 6PF 25MHZ 6MHZ 4 40X1 4PP BRACKET PTC10 un 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 1U 3300P 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny
92. 69 1 0K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R643 4 01869 1 0K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R651 4 01869 1 0K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R743 4 01869 1 0K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R751 4 01869 1 0K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R644 4 01917 100K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R682 4 01917 100K Resistor Thick Film 596 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R744 4 01917 100K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R782 4 01917 100K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R281 4 01948 2 0M Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R282 4 01948 2 0M Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R581 4 01948 2 0M Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R582 4 01948 2 0M Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R617 4 02061 100 Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R652 4 02061 100 Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R717 4 02061 100 Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R752 4 02061 100 Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R616 4 02090 200 Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R618 4 02090 200 Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R716 4 02090 200 Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R718 4 02090 200 Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm 1 16W 0603 Chip R383 4 02107 301 Resistor Thin Film 196
93. 773 6 00773 3 01320 3 01320 3 01320 1 00251 1 00233 1 00233 1 00233 1 00233 1 00234 6 00174 6 00684 6 00174 6 00684 6 00174 6 00684 7 01709 4 01466 4 01230 4 01213 4 01213 4 01155 4 01213 4 01155 4 01213 4 01155 4 01213 4 01155 4 01163 4 01117 4 01139 4 01110 0 1UF 16V X7R 1U 1U 1U 1U 0 1UF 16V X7R 47U 33U T35 1U 16V A CASE 47U 33U T35 1U 16V A CASE 47U 33U T35 1U 16V A CASE RED BAV70LT1 ROHS BAV70LT1 ROHS BAV70LT1 ROHS BAV70LT1 ROHS MMBZ5232BLT1 SMBJ12CA SMBJ12CA SMBJ12CA SMBJ12CA RED RED RED RED 1206L020 1206L020 1206L020 1206L020 HCPL 2630 HCPL 2630 HCPL 2630 10 PIN DIL RT ANGLE RT ANGLE RT ANGLE RT ANGLE 96 PIN RT ANGLE 6611 TYPE 43 10UH 6611 TYPE 43 10UH 6611 TYPE 43 10UH PTC 300 15 0K 10 0K 10 0K 2 49K 10 0K 2 49K 10 0K 2 49K 10 0K 2 49K 3 01K 1 00K 1 69K 845 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad SMD TANTALUM Y Case SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad SMD TANTALUM Y Case SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad SMD TANTALUM Y Case SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark LED T1 Package 3mm diameter BAV70LT1 BA
94. 989 4 01466 4 01519 4 01519 4 01431 4 01510 4 01514 4 01479 4 00954 4 00954 4 00954 4 01423 4 01423 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 1UF 16V X7R 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 0 01UF 16V 33U T35 1U 16V A CASE 1U 16V A CASE 1500P 047U 33U T35 33U T35 33U T35 0 1UF 16V X7R RED MINI GREEN GREEN GREEN GREEN YELLOW RED B270 13 MOC213 M 60 PIN DIL 1 00MM FFC SMT 2 PIN WHITE 3 PIN STRAIGHT SMO6B SHLS TF XF2M 3315 1A CTC100 F P PCB IRFR3410 IRFR3410 IRFR3410 IRFR3410 300 47K 47K 10 20K 30K 1 0K 20 20 20 4 7 4 7 TO HOLD CNCTRS DOWN SMD TANTALUM Y Case SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark SMT Tantalum 16V A case 1206 but NEEDS POLARITY mark Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 SMD TANTALUM Y Case SMD TANTALUM Y Case SMD TANTALUM Y Case LED Subminiature 1 8mm T 3 4 LED T1 Package 3mm diameter LED T1 Package 3mm diameter LED T1 Package 3mm diameter LED T1 Package 3mm diameter LED T1 Package 3mm diameter LED T1 Package 3mm diameter MOC213 Transistor Output Optocoupler CTR 100 min SO 8 Header SIM Polarized Header SIM w Friction Lock Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor T
95. Controller Operation 39 Front panel controls The front panel has four menu keys labeled Select Channels Show Data Program and Setup These keys can be pressed at any time to display one of the four main screens The front panel also has a Help button that displays help text for whatever is currently on screen and an Output Enable button that turns all the CTC100 s outputs on and off Most front panel controls have an equivalent remote command that performs the same function over RS 232 USB GPIB or Ethernet For quick reference the equivalent remote command is listed after the name of each front panel control Parts of the command that are in italics should not be entered literally but should be replaced with an appropriate value See the Programming section for more information on remote commands USB logging indicator System log logTo RAM USB None When the CTC100 is logging to a USB memory device a small white triangle appears in the upper right corner of all screens when the CTC100 is not logging to USB the triangle is a dark blue color greyed out The triangle confirms that the system is logging to USB and can also be used to start and stop USB logging If the triangle is white touch it to turn USB logging off equivalent to pressing the System Log Log To button and selecting RAM When it s dark blue touch it to turn USB logging on If a USB memory device is present but not functioning i e
96. Ferrite Bead SMD Type 43 44 1812 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 139 RAFF AF FFF FF AFA FF FFF FFA A RFRFAZRB E c c o x u102 u201 u202 u204 u206 u302 U303 U304 U401 U440 U470 U520 U530 U540 U600 U610 U620 Y101 Y201 Y440 Y601 ZO Zi Backplane assembly 209 C111 C121 C131 C141 C142 C143 C144 C150 C160 C161 C201 C202 SRS 4 00911 4 01727 4 01727 4 01727 4 00911 4 00911 4 00911 4 00911 4 00910 4 00910 4 00905 4 00905 4 00905 4 00905 4 00905 4 00905 4 00911 4 00911 4 00910 4 00912 4 00912 4 0 4 0 727 727 2 00053 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 229 230 231 232 837 233 235 236 236 237 240 743 241 241 241 835 3 00663 3 0 836 6 00662 6 00762 6 00664 6 00772 0 00187 7 01773 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00601 5 00
97. HBRCOnEERCUDMC M 28 Rack mounting the CTCI 00 eese eee eee eese eene tense tense tensa stas se tns senos 28 Using PID feedback 4 eere eere eese eee eene ee ettet tn stas tna senatus sense ens ensstnun 29 Basie CONCEPTS Sane RURRS 29 BA EINO IK Oln A EE A E 30 Automatic tuning algorithms eee esee eese entente tette tetn tne t tenente a 33 Using the automatic tunel ica e iere ceed dabudannkannkaLnckeaadanadens 36 Using alarms with PID feedback loops 38 Front panel controls sccscscccsscssscccscssccsscsseessscseesssccseessscscesssccseessscsesessceseeens 39 USB dlorperanfa aziro ede 39 Mod c E 39 Output Enable Y Keys 25 tocan eb RERO RUE URDU SEST 39 E mscernhl m 40 Show Data SCFeBR idi dee iie E c n e ER RE REA EHE ERROR ais 40 Programi eil 46 SRS CTC 00 Programmable Temperature Controller Contents ii Eu DNE M 50 Firmware updates eee e eee esee eee ee esee teens sete ens sse t esas set ena asset enses etes sese tensa see enuo 71 Replacing the memory backup battery cccsssssssssssssessssesssecsssesscsesesessones 72 Remote programming 73 Connecting to the C TC 00 dieere etre eentrice terre eee trece Enero se dede cae Dei qe dodo 73 Communication assembly and run time errors
98. NSOR LM358 Dual low power 1 MHz GBW op amp TL431C Adjustable Shunt Voltage Regulator 100 mA SOT23 5 16 bit Rail Rail DAC Analog mux 8 to 1 15V okay TTL compat Quad SPDT 175nsec 25ohms ONres 78M05 74HCO08 Quad 2 Input AND Gate 74HC595 8 Bit Serial Input Parallel Output Shift Register 74HC138 3 to 8 line decoder demultiplexer inverting SMD TANTALUM Y Case CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 SMD TANTALUM Y Case Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 SMD TANTALUM C Case CAP 47UF 16V CERAMIC X7R 1206 CAP 47UF 16V CERAMIC X7R 1206 CAP 47UF 16V CERAMIC X7R 1206 CAP 47UF 16V CERAMIC X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 SMD TANTALUM C Case CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 152 C302 C310 C311 C330 C331 C340 C351 C352 C353 C361 C362 C363 C371 C372 C373 D101 D201 D202 D203 D204 D246 D301 D302 D303 D304 D341 D342 D343 D344 F301 F302 F303 F304 18310 18311 1S330 J101 J301 J302 J303 J304 JD101 L351 L352 L361 L362 L371 L372 PCI R101 R201 R202 R203 R204 R205 R206 R207 R208 R209 R210 R227 R228 R230 R231 SRS 5 00601 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00299 5 00601 5 00035 5 00519 5 00513 5 00035 5 00519 5 00513 5 00035 5 00519 5 00513 3 00011 3 00544 3 00544 3 00544 3 00544 3 01384 3 01880 3 01880 3 01880 3 01880 3 00011 3 00011 3 00011 3 00011 6 00773 6 00773 6 00
99. Power supply mounting screws Wire Wire Wire Wire PIDG ring terminal 22 18 guage Blue faston terminal 0 25 in PIDG ring terminal 16 14 AWG 6 for ground wire Fan Fuse holder AC power inlet I O card support screws 0 188 inch faston terminal Black Phillips screws for top and bottom covers 10 PIN DIL CNCTR to 9 PIN D SUB Plug for 24V board to board wiring Plug for 24V supply to board wiring 3 pin white plug for fan AC power plug for motherboard Crimp contacts for AC power plug Front panel ribbon cable White LCD display cable Power switch 2 inch speaker Main switching power supply 4A 120V slow blow fuse 2A 250V slow blow fuse Stand Plastic bezel for front panel Rack mount tray Chassis metal Front panel Plastic front panel overlay Motherboard bracket Power supply mounting bracket CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 136 7 02186 7 02187 7 02201 7 02206 7 02225 8 00021 8 00098 9 00267 CPU card assembly 207 BT101 0 01089 BT101A 6 00789 C101 5 00334 C102 5 00601 C103 5 00471 C104 5 00609 C105 5 00609 C106 5 00609 C107 5 00609 C108 5 00609 C109 5 00609 C110 5 00609 C111 5 00609 C112 5 00609 C113 5 00609 C114 5 00609 C115 5 00609 C116 5 00609 C117 5 00609 C118 5 00609 C119 5 00609 C120 5 00609 C121 5 00609 C122 5 00609 C123 5 00609 C124 5 00609 C125 5 00609 C126 5 00609 C127 5 00609 C128 5 00609 C129 5 00609 C130 5 00609 C131 5 00609 C132 5 00609 C20
100. T146 26 PIN 2 PIN DI 40 PIN J1012F21C 10 PIN DIL 4 PIN USB URA 1002 120 PIN RT ANGL FR47 FR47 FR47 FR47 FR47 FR47 FR47 PTC100 CPU PCB 47K 0603 SMT 10K SMT 0603 22 4 7K SMT 0603 22 10 4 7K SMT 0603 4 7K SMT 0603 4 7K SMT 0603 4 7K SMT 0603 20 0K 2 49K 24 9K 4 7K SMT 0603 49 9 SMT 0603 49 9 SMT 0603 49 9 SMT 0603 49 9 SMT 0603 4 7K SMT 0603 330 1 0M 1 0M 0 0 0 4 7KX4D Se eee ee ee Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 Capacitor Electrolytic 16V 20 Rad Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Electrolytic 16V 20 Rad Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 LED Subminiature 1 8mm T 3 4 LED Subminiature 1 8mm T 3 4 LED Subminiature 1 8mm T 3 4 LED Subminiature 1 8mm T 3 4 LED Subminiature 1 8mm T 3 4 LED Subminiature 1 8mm T 3 4 LED Subminiature 1 8mm T 3 4 LED Subminiature 1 8mm T 3 4 LED Subminiature 1 8mm T 3 4 LED T1 Package 3mm diameter Header SIM Header DIM Locking Clips 3 Row Right Angle Mount Ferrite Bead SMD Type 43 44 1812 Ferrite Bead SMD Type 43 44 1812 Ferrite Bead SMD Type 43 44 1812 Ferrite Bead SMD Type 43 44 1812 Ferrite Bead SMD Type 43 44 1812 Ferrite Bead SMD Type 43 44 1812
101. TICAL 3 Row Vertical JD102 00235 96 PIN VERTICAL 3 Row Vertical JD103 00235 96 PIN VERTICAL 3 Row Vertical JD104 00235 96 PIN VERTICAL 3 Row Vertical JD105 00235 96 PIN VERTICAL 3 Row Vertical JD107 00237 120 PIN VERTICA 3 Row Vertical Mount L241 6 00691 22UH SMT SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller L251 6 00691 22UH SMT PCI 7 02178 CTC100 BACKPLAN Q211 3 00283 IRF530 IRF532 100V 14A N Channel MOSFET R DS on 0 140 ohms Q212 3 00283 IRF530 IRF532 100V 14A N Channel MOSFET R DS on 0 140 ohms R121 4 01439 22 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R160 4 00082 470K Resistor Carbon Film 1 4W 5 R161 4 00082 470K Resistor Carbon Film 1 4W 5 R162 4 01510 20K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R163 4 01503 10K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R164 4 01459 150 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R165 4 01510 20K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R166 4 01448 51 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R201 4 01439 22 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R202 4 01406 0 Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT R203 4 01406 0 Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT R204 4 01406 0 Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT R205 4 01406 0 Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT R206 4 01406 0 Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT R207 4 01406 0 Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT R211 4 01479 1 0K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R212 4 01158 2 67K Resistor
102. The log rate controls how often channel readings are logged The log rate can be set independently for each channel the default is one point per second Normally the time between log points should be longer than the time between A D samples in which case multiple A D readings are averaged together to create each logged value If on the other hand the time between log points is shorter than the time between A D samples each A D reading is recorded more than once in the log The plot screen always displays logged data Therefore a slow log rate reduces the noise in the graphs but may produce a stairstep appearance while a fast log rate produces graphs with more detail but also more noise Format of CTCI00 log files SRS The CTC100 saves data in a compact binary format shared with the SRS PTC10 Because the log files cannot easily be read by other programs a PTCFileConverter program is available from the SRS website This program converts the binary files to various text formats readable by other programs For users who want to create their own programs to read CTC100 log files this section describes the native binary format Each CTC100 log file contains data from one channel and consists of a header followed by one or more records Each record contains a record header followed by zero or more floating point data values The floating point values within a record are evenly spaced in time and are expressed in the same units as on the CTC1
103. Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF R213 4 01455 100 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R214 4 01455 100 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R215 4 01021 100 Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF R216 4 01021 100 Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF R217 4 01001 61 9 Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF R218 4 00436 0 1 Resistor Wire wound R231 4 01458 130 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R232 4 01466 300 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R233 4 01472 510 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R234 4 00029 1 8K Resistor Carbon Film 1 4W 5 R235 4 00029 1 8K Resistor Carbon Film 1 4W 5 R236 4 00048 2 2K Resistor Carbon Film 1 4W 5 R241 4 01479 1 0K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R251 4 01479 1 0K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT RN111 4 01727 22X4 RN112 4 01727 22X4 RN131 4 01727 22X4 RN132 4 01727 22X4 RN143 4 00905 82X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN144 4 00905 82X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN145 4 00905 82X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 596 Tiny RN146 4 00905 82X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny T211 6 00774 PTC220 U110 3 01345 4ABT541CSC Uu120 3 01346 74HC4040M u130 3 00795 74AC138 74AC138 3 to 8 Line Decoder U140 3 01498 74ABT16245CMTD U150 3 01239 MAX3233ECWP Uu160 3 00094 LM311 LM311 Voltage Comparator Uu201 3 00742 74HC74 74HC74 Dual D Type Flip Flop With Clear and Preset SO 14 u202 3 00782 74HCO2 74HCO2 Quad 2 Input NOR Gate U210 3 00919
104. U362 3 01977 LM317MABDTG U370 3 01235 74LCX04M ZO 7 02036 BLK CAP Z1 7 02037 RED CAP L2 1 01252 050R33 075B GPIB option assembly 289 C111 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C112 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C113 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C114 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C121 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C122 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C123 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C124 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C131 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C132 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C133 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C134 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C135 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C136 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C137 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C138 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C139 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C140 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C150 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C161 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C162 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C163 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R J140 1 00160 IEEE488 STAND Connector IEEE488 Standard R A Female J160 1 00251 10 PIN DIL Header DIM Locking Clips J202 1 01291 40 PIN PC1 7 01892 PTC240 GPIB R131 4 01406 0 Resistor Thick Film 596 300 ppm SMT U110 3 01236 74LCX16245MTD u120 3 01236 74LCX16245MTD U130 3 01019 TNT4882 BQ GPIB SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 144 U140 U150 U160 Y101 ZO Z1 3 01742 3 00741 3 01743 6 00756 0 00500 7 01736 74VCX245WM 74HC04 ISPGAL22V10AV 40 MHZ 554043 1 PTC BRKT 74HC04 Hex Inverter 2 channel thermistor RTD diode reader assembly 310 ZO Zi J300 JDR121 J200 J500 Z2
105. User Manual CTCIOO Cryogenic Temperature Controller RS Stanford Research Systems Version 1 8 June 26 2015 Certification Stanford Research Systems certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment Warranty This Stanford Research Systems product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment Service For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a Stanford Research Systems authorized service facility Contact Stanford Research Systems or an authorized representative before returning this product for repair Information in this document is subject to change without notice Copyright Stanford Research Systems Inc 2015 All rights reserved Stanford Research Systems Inc 1290 C Reamwood Avenue Sunnyvale California 94089 Phone 408 744 9040 Fax 408 744 9049 www thinkSRS com Printed in the U S A SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Contents i Contents Safety and preparation for use eee eee e eee esee eese eee een esset esas set ena asset enata eno v Specifications ETT vii Introduction l Connecting the inputs and outputs seesseesseesseesoeesceesoeesoeesoeesoeeseeeoeesoeecseesoeesoeesose 3 Temperature sensor MPU aseisiin are AGAR AIRE AI ERE A IAS 3 o P Mii igrorlsiitd e 6 EI OV analog AO chann els 5 tri
106. V70LT1 BAV70LT1 BAV70LT1 5 6V Zener LED T1 Package 3mm diameter LED T1 Package 3mm diameter LED T1 Package 3mm diameter LED T1 Package 3mm diameter Header DIM Locking Clips BNC PCB Panel Mount Right Angle Isolated BNC PCB Panel Mount Right Angle Isolated BNC PCB Panel Mount Right Angle Isolated BNC PCB Panel Mount Right Angle Isolated 3 Row Right Angle Mount Ferite Bead Thru hole Type 43 Inductor SMD Type R 23MHz 240mA 10 1210 Ferite Bead Thru hole Type 43 Inductor SMD Type R 23MHz 240mA 10 1210 Ferite Bead Thru hole Type 43 Inductor SMD Type R 23MHz 240mA 10 1210 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 153 R234 4 01156 2 55K Resistor Thin Film 196 50 ppm MELF RNI101 4 01704 100Kx4D 596 Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 596 Tiny RN102 4 00911 4 7KX4D Network DIP
107. V99 DUAL SERIES DIODE 70V BREAKDOWN D251 3 00457 1N5241B 1N5241B 11V 500mW DO 35 ZENER DIODE D252 3 00457 1N5241B 1N5241B 11V 500mW DO 35 ZENER DIODE D253 3 00457 1N5241B 1N5241B 11V 500mW DO 35 ZENER DIODE F221 6 00644 1A 60V F222 6 00644 1A 60V ISO500 3 00446 6N137 Hi Speed Optocoupler ISO510 3 01320 HCPL 2630 ISO511 3 01320 HCPL 2630 IS0530 3 01320 HCPL 2630 J111 1 00251 10 PIN DIL Header DIM Locking Clips JDR121 1 00234 96 PIN RT ANGLE 3 Row Right Angle Mount E211 6 01005 22 UH L310 6 00684 10UH Inductor SMD Type R 23MHz 240mA 10 1210 SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 150 L311 L320 L321 L351 PCBI Q210 Q220 Q233 Q234 Q235 Q251 Q252 Q253 Q330 R112 R202 R203 R206 R207 R208 R211 R212 R213 R214 R215 R216 R217 R222 R223 R224 R225 R226 R231 R232 R233 R234 R235 R236 R237 R238 R239 R240 R241 R242 R251 R252 R253 R255 R256 R257 R263 R264 R271 R273 R274 R331 R332 R501 R502 RN111 RN112 RN113 RN121 RN272 SRS 0 00000 6 00684 6 00174 6 00174 7 02177 3 02065 3 01254 3 01254 3 01254 3 01254 3 02075 3 02075 3 02075 3 02065 4 01466 4 01186 4 01309 4 01186 4 01309 4 00436 4 01157 4 01292 4 01130 4 01029 4 01285 4 01096 4 02546 4 00645 4 00645 4 00645 4 00645 4 01151 4 01175 4 01155 4 01117 4 01050 4 01175 4 01155 4 01117 4 01050 4 01175 4 01155 4 01117 4 01050 4 02525 4 02526 4 00925 4 01050 4 01050
108. X5R C591 5 00841 1UF 16V X5R C592 5 00841 1UF 16V X5R C593 5 00841 1UF 16V X5R C594 5 00841 1UF 16V X5R C642 5 00841 1UF 16V X5R C742 5 00841 1UF 16V X5R L300 6 01030 FT 87 W PCB 7 02172 PTC100 PCB PCB 7 02172 PTC100 PCB 100W DC output card assembly 206 C111 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C112 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C113 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C121 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C122 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C123 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller C124 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C203 5 00606 1U 100V C204 5 00389 1500P Capacitor Mono 50V 5 NPO 1206 C205 5 00850 0 33U PEN 16V C211 5 00607 10U 50V SMT C212 5 00299 1Uu Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C213 5 00840 10 UF X7S C214 5 00840 10 UF X7S C216 5 00525 1u CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C217 5 00298 01U Capacitor Mono 50V 1096 X7R 1206 C220 5 00299 1Uu Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C222 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C223 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C232 5 00629 1000P X 4 C233 5 00299 IU Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C234 5 00299 1Uu Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C235 5 00299 Pa 8 Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C240 5 00299 AL Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C245 5 00627 0 1U X4 C250 5 00299 IU Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C251 5 00299 IU Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C261 5 00299 1U Capacit
109. abilities of the CTC100 The macros are shown on multiple lines for clarity and can only be run as shown if they are input with a USB memory stick as follows 1 Enter the macro into a text editor such as Notepad Save the macro as an ASCII text file with the extension txt Copy the file into a directory named macros on a USB memory stick or hard drive 2 Plug the USB stick or drive into the CTC100 3 Press the CTC100 s System key A button with the macro s file name should appear in the Macros column Touch the button to start running the macro The button remains highlighted as long as the macro is running Touch the highlighted button to stop the macro If the sample macros are sent to the CTC100 via the RS 232 GPIB USB device or Ethernet port each macro must be formatted as a single line with the comments removed otherwise each line will be treated as a separate macro and the lines will all run at the same time instead of sequentially Temperature profiles The following macro ramps the temperature controlled by channel Out 1 to 100 C at a rate of 1 C second Once the ramp is complete the system pauses for 1 minute at 100 C and then ramps the temperature down to 80 C After another 1 minute pause the system is allowed to cool back to room temperature by changing the feedback setpoint to 0 degrees without ramping Outl PID ramp 1 set the ramp rate to 1 degree s Outl PID setpoint 100 start a ramp to 100 de
110. acro over an I O port it may start running before the previous macro has finished In addition it s possible to run multiple instances of a saved macro simultaneously SRS CTC 00 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 77 Macro names The CTC can run up to 10 concurrent macros received over any one I O port and up to 20 concurrent macros from all sources combined including the startup macro macros received over all of the I O ports and macros started from the Program screen If more than this number of macros is received a Too many macros assembly error is generated and the macro does not run If the CTC is turned off and turned back on again macros that were running when the CTC100 was turned off are not restarted When a macro is sent to the CTC over an I O port at least one instruction is executed before any later macros sent on the same port begin to run Therefore if each message sent to an I O port contains only one instruction the instructions always run sequentially in the order that they were sent If some messages contain two or more instructions the CTC may execute them concurrently and replies may not be received in the expected order Each running macro has a name that can be used by the ki11 instruction to stop the macro and also appears in a tab on the Program screen It is possible to have two or more macros with the same name running If a macro is started by a remote command with 32 or fewer char
111. acters the macro name is the same as the remote command If the command has more than 32 characters the CTC100 assigns the name Program XY where XY is a two digit number If a macro is started from the Program screen its name is the text in the Input field If the Input field contains more than 32 characters the macro name is Program XY where XY is a two digit number If the macro was started by pressing a macro button on the System screen the macro name is the text on the macro button If the name is too long for the button and has been truncated on screen the full name of the macro is used A macro can change its own name with the name instruction Use kill list to get the names of all currently running macros Command syntax ASRS instruction argument instruction argument instruction Many instructions must be followed by some sort of value The value must be separated from the instruction by whitespace and or an optional equals sign Numeric values can be incremented using the operator There is no operator but the operator can be used with negative arguments If the argument is selected from a list it can also be incremented using the operator An integer argument must be supplied that indicates how many places to advance in the list If the value is incremented past the end or beginning of the list it wraps back to the beginning or end of the list If a question mark follows the instruction no argum
112. acters but must not contain any spaces to type the degree sign on Windows computers hold down the alt key and type 0176 on the number pad Anything following the first whitespace character on this line is ignored therefore the XY data must begin on the second line If the display units are C F K or mK the CTC100 automatically converts calibrated readings to the units specified by the System Display Units control If any other units are specified they override the System Display Units control and the control has no effect on the channel s reading Such non standard units can be used for example to convert data to non temperature units All text after the units declaration and before the first numeric value is ignored as long as the text does not contain any numeric values i e digits periods or plus or minus signs If the units deceleration is not present all text before the first numeric value is ignored Calibration data The second line of the sample table above contains a calibration point consisting of two numeric values the first is the value that s displayed on the front panel and the second is the corresponding value that s measured or produced at the back panel This line indicates that when the measured value is 100 ohms the CTC100 should show a reading of 0 C The displayed value must be expressed in whichever units are declared in the first line of the calibration table or in Kelvins if no
113. aits to receive data from the CPU C17 SIZ16 Transfer size 16 Can be used to enable 16 bit data transfers Currently not used C18 CONV Convert A rising or falling edge on this line puts the I O card into a standby state for 5 ms during which the I O card is inactive The CPU card normally requests the I O card s ADC readings during this period 5 ms after the falling edge the I O card exits the standby state and begins an ADC conversion If it does not receive the CONV signal the I O card never performs any ADC conversions byte write 2 byte read D107 Start End cst M transaction transaction 7 R W N Write Read 2nd byte has been read Byte is MRDY X ready Ist byte has a been read Byte has 2nd byte SEDE yx been read ML Ist byte y is ready is ready Parallel bus timing diagram For simplicity only a byte write and 2 byte read are shown but reads and writes generally transfer at least 3 bytes each SPI bus The SPI bus is used to reprogram the Atmel microcontrollers on the I O cards The card s Card Select CS line must be pulled low for its SPI bus to become active C20 SCK SPI Clock C21 MOSI Master out slave in C22 MISO Master in slave out CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 130 Front panel GPIB card UART Connected to the CTC100 s back panel RS 232 port The I O cards do not use and are not connected to the backplane UART A
114. alibration points are separated by less than about 50 C it s usually easier and more accurate to load the calibration in the form of a calibration table instead of calculating the Callendar van Dusen coefficients Thermistors If the sensor is a thermistor and the calibration type is set to custom the A B and C settings are the Steinhart Hart coefficients The temperature T expressed in K is calculated from the thermistor resistance R in ohms based on the following equation T A B In R C In R If a standard thermistor calibration is selected the A B and C controls are automatically changed to show the best fit coefficients for whichever curve is selected These figures are approximations only and are not actually used to calculate the temperature unless the calibration type is changed to Custom Diodes If the sensor is a diode and the calibration type is set to custom the A B and C settings are a polynomial fit to the diode calibration curve T A BV CV where T is the temperature in Kelvins and V is the voltage across the diode in volts Note that polynomial fits are only accurate within a limited temperature range If a standard diode calibration is selected the A B and C controls show best fit coefficients for whichever curve is selected These figures are approximations only and may not produce the same results as the standard calibration curve A standard diode or bipolar junction transistor can be c
115. ameter error Channel PID Setpoint 0 0 Determines the PID setpoint The PID loop attempts to keep the input at this value by changing the output Errors Attempting to set the setpoint when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error Issuing a set point instruction when the PID mode is set to Follow produces an assembly time Unrecognized instruction error Channel PID TMin 0 0 Each of the eight PID memory locations can be assigned a temperature range for zoned feedback If zoned feedback is enabled by setting Channe1 PID Zone to Auto any given memory location is automatically recalled whenever the PID input temperature enters its temperature range CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 104 SRS The Channel PID TMin instruction determines that temperature range It assigns a lower temperature bound to whichever memory location is currently selected There is no TMax instruction the upper end of the temperature range is the next highest TMin value in the memory table Errors Attempting to set the minimum zone temperature when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error Channel PID Zone 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Auto Sets the PID temperature zone A set of PID gains an input sensor and a minimum temperature can be assigned to each of eight temperature zones If the zone is set to Auto a set of stored feedback parameters is
116. andard ROX calibrations RTDs Choose ITS 90 for RTDs with an alpha of 0 00385 US for RTDs with an alpha of 0 00392 or Custom to enter your own Callendar van Dusen calibration coefficients Thermistors The available calibration types are named according to the resistance of the thermistor at 25 C Thermistors from Omega Measurement Specialties Inc formerly YSI and others that conform to the same calibration curve are supported Note that there are no international standards for thermistors Therefore thermistors from different companies may not be compatible with each other or with the CTC100 s built in calibrations even though they have the correct resistance at 25 C The CTC100 uses ASCII character 234 for the Ohms symbol To type this character on a Windows computer hold down the alt key and type 0234 on the number pad On Windows computers the character appears as a letter e with a circumflex accent A Sensor RTD thermistor and diode only B Sensor RTD thermistor and diode only C Sensor RTD thermistor and diode only RO Sensor RTD only Channel Cal A 0 0 Channel Cal B 0 0 Channel Cal C 0 0 Channel Cal R0 0 0 These settings allow you to enter Steinhart Hart Callendar van Dusen or polynomial fit coefficients for your RTD thermistor or diode sensor respectively The settings are only available if the Sensor control is set to one of these three sensor types and the Cal Typ
117. anged to A heater current or V heater voltage Note that the low lmt and hi lmt settings are not automatically converted to the new units Channel Value 0 0 If the indicated channel is an output channe1 value changes the channel s output value Regardless of whether the channel is an input or an output channe1 value returns the current value of the channel Attempting to set its value of an input channel produces a run time error Attempting to set the value of an output channel when outputs are disabled also produces a run time error Setting the value of an output channel under feedback control has no effect but no error is generated Examples Outl value 1 0 Sets channel Out 1 to output 1 watt of power Note that spaces in the channel s name should be omitted Inl value Queries the output of channel In1 The response is a numeric value such as 37 4722 if System Com Verbose is set to Low or Medium or Inl value 37 4722 if System Com Verbose is set to High If sensor Inl is not connected or is out of the range of its calibration data the reported value is NaN not a number For input channels and measured output channels the current value reported by the CTC100 is the most recent ADC reading with the sensor calibration and lowpass difference etc filters applied This value may be different than the most recently logged point which is the value that appears on the plot and in general corresponds to an a
118. as the connectors on the back panel 1 Group 1 Input Output 3 AIO DIO In 1 In 3 Out 1 Out 2 AIO 1 DIO 24 53 C 0 000 A 0 000 W 10 00V 0 In 2 In 4 AlO2 Relays 2474 C 2531 C 10 00 V 0 AIO 3 V1 10 00 V AIO 4 V2 10 00 V The AIO column shows the four analog I O channels while the DIO column shows the digital I O channel the alarm relays and the three virtual channels V1 V2 and V3 that can be used to perform real time calculations The Select screen controls which channels appear on the Numeric Plot and Channel Setup screens To select a channel touch a button on the Select screen the button becomes lighter indicating that the channel is selected Touch the button again to deselect the channel Configure the sensor inputs Select the sensor type and calibration curve as follows 1 Press the Select key and select one or more inputs 2 Press the Channel key The top of the screen has one tab for each selected channel Touch one of the tabs to display the settings for that channel 3 Touch the Sensor button and select the appropriate sensor type RTD thermistor diode etc j SRS CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 13 4 Set the Range to Auto 5 In the Cal column touch the Type button and select the appropriate calibration curve If the sensor reading does not appear The sensor reading is blank whenever it fa
119. asurement the relay tuner sets the heater output to Output for the Lag time to start the oscillation If during this period the feedback input does not change by at least ten times the drift and noise value an error message is displayed in the Status window and tuning is cancelled If this occurs either 1 ensure that the temperature is stable before starting the step response 2 increase step Y or 3 if it looks like the temperature didn t have enough time to respond increase the Lag time The tuner then sets the output to the Outputhign value Then each time the temperature crosses its initial value 50 C in the figure above the output is switched from high to low or low to high CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 34 SRS This produces a temperature oscillation 180 out of phase with the output oscillation The tuner performs two oscillation cycles not including the kick start and measures the period and amplitude of the second oscillation The relay tuner has to wait several times for the temperature to cross its initial value If the temperature measurement is disturbed during this time for example if the temperature sensor is moved or if the sensor is in an oven and the oven door is opened the temperature may never cross its initial value and the tuner may run indefinitely without finishing Step response tuner Multiple 1 min 2 min 4 min Temperature top and heater power bottom during st
120. at the left hand edge of the graph any values entered here by the user are ignored If Automatically j SRS CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 119 ASRS scale X is not checked the time entered here determines the time at the left hand edge of the graph X maximum if Automatically scale X is checked this box indicates the time at the right hand edge of the graph any values entered here by the user are ignored If Automatically scale X is not checked the time entered here determines the time at the right hand edge of the graph Automatically scale Y if checked the graph is automatically scaled to show the full vertical span of the data The graph is automatically rescaled as necessary whenever the data is modified Y minimum if Automatically scale Y is checked this box indicates the lower limit of the graph any values entered here by the user are ignored If Automatically scale Y is not checked the value entered here determines the lower limit of the graph Y maximum if Automatically scale Y is checked this box indicates the upper limit of the graph any values entered here by the user are ignored If Automatically scale Y is not checked the value entered here determines the upper limit of the graph Suppress X axis label if checked the graph s X axis is not labeled This option is intended for use when two or more graphs with the same X range are stacked on top of each other Number o
121. backplane board CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 128 Backplane SRS The backplane uses a proprietary parallel bus to connect the CPU card to the six I O cards and the front panel The bus has six I O card slots All six slots are equivalent only the chassis cutouts constrain which cards are plugged into which slots The backplane also includes 5V and 3 3V switching power supplies for the CTC100 s digital components and 10 20 and 20V switching supplies for the low noise analog circuitry Jumper J203 connects the analog supply ground to the system ground if removed the analog supplies operate with a floating ground A circuit is available U201 U202 to synchronize the switching frequency of the various switching supplies with each other potentially reducing noise The circuit is normally not used since it doesn t have a noticeable effect on noise levels An AC power bus J100 J104 distributes 120 or 220VAC power to any CTC420 AC output cards that are installed The AC power connectors have a lifetime of 25 mate unmate cycles Connected to the AC bus is a line trigger circuit that synchronizes the A D sampling actually the CONV signal see the description of pin C18 below with the 50 or 60 Hz line frequency If this circuit fails the CTC100 may become unresponsive Jumper J160 can be used to synchronize the CONV signal to a 1 MHz clock instead of the line frequency in this case the A D sam
122. bels at the bottom of each graph show the full time and date Elapsed the labels only indicate the amount of time between grid lines The elapsed time labels do not actually reflect the amount of time elapsed since any particular event and reset to zero once per minute hour or day depending on the X range of the graph SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 55 SRS Multiple wtar 1911 19 11 r1911 hr ii Absolute X labels Multiple 50 1 50 0 49 9 1 3 1 2 oio 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min Elapsed X labels Figures System Display Figures 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Sets the number of figures that are shown after the decimal point on the Numeric tab of the Show Data screen and in values sent in response to remote queries Fewer digits are shown if the value is greater than 1000 or less than 1000 or if the requested number of digits doesn t fit into the available space This setting does not affect logged data or plots Setup screen System tab Other column Volume System Other Volume Off 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Max Sets the speaker volume The volume affects all sounds including alarms Time System Other Time time Sets the time of day Does not affect the time stamps of previously acquired data points For example if the time is advanced by one hour a one hour gap appears in the plot Conversely if the CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 56
123. between 10 and 1000 ms system other fan off low medium high max auto Controls the system fan speed Settings other than auto can reduce the accuracy of temperature measurements and cause the DC outputs to overheat and shut down system other date month day year system other time hours minutes Sets the time and date Note that setting the time and date can adversely affect the display of previously acquired data The time string should be in the form 10 57 am while the date string should include the month day and year in that order i e Apr 7 2008 or 4 7 08 system other reset Running macros Saved macros Front panel Ports Port settings User settings All Resets some or all user settings The options have the following effects Running macros stops all running macros Has no effect on saved macros j SRS CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 95 Channel setup ASRS Saved macros deletes all saved macros from the CTC100 s internal memory but does not delete macros from USB memory devices Has no effect on running macros Display Resets all System Display settings to their factory defaults Returns the front panel to the Select menu de selects all channels in all groups and erases locally stored log data data on USB drives is not affected Returns all plots to autoscaled X and Y with a 1 minute X range and changes the plot location of all channels to
124. ble Temperature Controller Remote Programming 87 occur if the two macros were received on different I O ports or if one was started from the front panel While OPC is waiting new commands received over the source port are held in the input buffer The commands are not processed until OPC has finished waiting OPC Identical to OPC except that instead of setting the Operation Complete bit OPC writes 1 to the I O port once all tuning processes setpoint ramps and GPIB macros have finished PHO Port holdoff Prevents the I O port that received this instruction from processing any incoming messages until the current macro the macro that contains the PHO instruction has finished running Once the current macro is finished the I O port returns to its normal state and PHO has no further effect Not a standard IEEE488 2 instruction PMC Purge Macro Commands Erases all locally stored macros Does not affect macros stored on USB memory devices RST RST is equivalent to turning the instrument off and back on again except the Power On bit of the Event Status Register is not set RST has the following effects Outputs are disabled as if the Output enable button were pressed All currently running macros are stopped regardless of whether the macros were started by the GPIB interface another I O port or the Program screen The instrument returns to the Select screen Partially received instructions on
125. bly hot If autotuning is in progress when Step Y is changed the old value of Step Y is used Lag Channel Tune Lag 0 0 Controls how long the autotuner waits before it first checks the response of the system to the output disturbance This time should be long enough for the temperature to rise noticeably after the output is increased by Step Y If Lag is too small the autotuner will mistake small noise spikes for the system s response to the output disturbance If Lag is much larger than it needs to be the autotuner will produce inaccurate results Changes to the Lag setting doesn t affect any autotuning algorithms that are currently in progress Status Channel Tune Status Touch this button to view the progress of the autotuner CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 69 Type Channel Tune Type Cons Moderate Aggr Auto Controls the PID tuning rules used by the auto tuner Cons conservative results in minimal overshoot ideally zero overshoot but very slow response Aggr aggressive results in much faster feedback response but typically 25 overshoot Moderate provides intermediate results Auto uses the conservative setting for step response tuning and aggressive for relay tuning Works well if the step response tuner is used for an initial rough tuning at room temperature and the relay tuner is used for a final tuning once the system has reached its target temperature Regardless of the tuning
126. calibration file also has to be renamed or the custom calibration will no longer be read the next time the CTC100 is turned on Press the Channel Cal Details button to see the first and last three data points in the custom calibration or if the calibration couldn t be read a description of the problem The CTC100 has three virtual channels that by default are named V1 V2 and V3 These channels are not connected to a physical input or output channel Instead they can mirror another channel or be assigned a value by a macro A custom calibration table offset gain factors difference filter lowpass and or derivative filter can be applied to the mirrored data Virtual channels can have alarms or PID feedback loops and their value can be graphed and saved to a log Virtual channels can be used to apply different sets of filters to a single channel For example channel 3A could show the temperature of an apparatus while virtual channel V1 could show the rate of change of that temperature Since a virtual channel s value can be set by a macro the channel can be used to reveal internal CTC parameters that cannot otherwise be graphed or saved to the log For example a virtual CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 25 channel show a feedback setpoint The channel can also display the results of a calculation such as the value of channel 3A divided by the value of channel 3B Logging data to USB The most recent 4096 da
127. cter on a Windows computer hold down the alt key and type 0234 on the number pad On Windows computers the character appears as a letter e with a circumflex accent Units Channel Units This button shows the native units in which the sensor is read It reads volts if the sensor type is diode or ohms if any other sensor type is selected The units cannot be changed directly but they change automatically if the sensor type is changed Plot Channel Plot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Indicates which plot this channel will appear in when the Plot screen is showing the plot type is Custom see the Plot Screen section above and this channel is selected on the Select screen Choose one of eight plots for the channel to appear in where plot 1 is the uppermost plot Empty CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 58 SRS plots won t appear on the Plot screen for example if all the selected channels have been assigned to plot 4 only one plot appears on the Custom plot screen Logging Channel hogging A Oft 0 1 s 0 3 Sy Il s T3 Sg TLO st 30s TI min 3 min 10 min 30 min 1 hr Default By default readings from all channels are saved to the log at the global log rate which is set on the System Setup screen System Log Interval However exceptions can be made for individual channels by setting a different rate with the Logging button To retur
128. dback loop in turn attempts to control the sensor temperature such that it tracks the ramp temperature Assuming the feedback is properly tuned and that your cryogenic hardware can respond quickly enough the sensor temperature should rise or fall at the ramp rate until it reaches the new setpoint If Ramp is set to zero ramping is disabled and the CTC100 heats or cools your system at the maximum possible rate Ramp T Channel PID RampT 0 0 The temperature that the PID feedback is trying to maintain This is an internally generated value that depends on the setpoint and the ramp rate During times when the feedback is disabled Ramp T automatically tracks the sensor temperature When the feedback is enabled Ramp T gradually increases or decreases at the ramp rate until the setpoint is reached This ensures that the temperature smoothly ramps from its initial value to the setpoint at a user determined rate If this behavior is undesirable for example if the CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 67 SRS ramp rate has been set to a small value but it s preferable to reach the setpoint quickly Ramp T can be manually set to another value typically the setpoint Once it reaches the setpoint Ramp T remains there until the setpoint is changed or the feedback is disabled If the setpoint is changed Ramp T increases or decreases at the ramp rate until it reaches the new setpoint If the feedback is disabled Ramp T immedia
129. dvantage of cascade control is that variations in the vent temperature can be accounted for much more quickly than would be possible with a single PID loop To use cascade feedback select one of the CTC100 s virtual channels V1 V2 or V3 to host the primary loop Make sure the direction of the channel is Set out or Meas out and then touch the button labeled Casc You should see a list of output channels Select the secondary channel from this list Its PID setpoint will continuously track the value of the virtual channel To disable cascade control touch the Casc button and then touch the selected channel to de select it CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 71 Firmware updates The CTC100 s firmware can be updated by copying a firmware file onto a USB stick plugging the USB stick into the CTC100 and running a macro Besides the CPU firmware each of the six I O cards and the front panel has its own firmware that can be upgraded In most cases firmware updates do not affect your settings or I O card calibration data However if the meaning of a particular setting has changed in the new firmware that setting may revert to its default value CPU firmware updates 1 The firmware update package supplied by SRS contains a release image img file and an update txt macro Copy the release image img file to the root directory of a USB flash drive or hard drive Copy the update txt macro
130. e Ramp T Memory locations without min values are never recalled in auto mode Ffwd Channel PID Ffwd Input channel Touch the Ffwd button to select a feedforward input channel The value of the selected channel is added to the PID feedback output at each A D conversion If the PID mode set to off outputs are disabled or no PID input channel is selected changes to the feedforward channel s value have no effect on the PID output To disable feedforward touch the Ffwd button and then touch the selected input channel Feedforward can be used to compensate for environmental or other factors that affect the feedback loop in predictable ways The feedforward input channel typically must be scaled using gt amp offset gain factors in the input channel s cal menu or a custom calibration table Setup screen for channels Out and Out 2 Tune column This column is used to configure the PID autotuner See the Automatic PID Tuning section for more details Step Y Channel Tune StepY 0 0 This setting determines how much the autotuner changes the heater power It should be large enough to increase the temperature by several degrees or significantly more than any noise or other temperature variations that would normally occur over several minutes If Step Y is too small autotuning will fail or may succeed but produce inaccurate feedback parameters If Step Y is too large the heater may become unaccepta
131. e Program screen While the macro is running more macros can be sent to the CTC100 Up to 10 macros can run at the same time although only the first four are shown on the Program screen Any macro sent to one of the I O ports must be written on a single line otherwise it will be interpreted as several macros to be run concurrently Each macro can have a maximum of 1024 characters while individual instructions or instruction arguments can have a maximum of 256 characters Instructions and arguments are case insensitive and can be separated by one or more whitespace characters as well as by special characters such as parentheses brackets equals signs etc Macros can also be stored as text files on a USB memory device When the USB device is plugged into the CTC100 the macro can be run from the Program window or called from other macros just like a saved macro It s easier to edit long macros when they are saved as text files since they can then include multiple lines and comments Macros can be saved under a name and a macro can call other saved macros by name macros must not however call themselves recursively If a macro is saved under a name that is the same as an instruction the saved macro takes precedence if the command is issued with a capital first letter the instruction takes precedence if the command has a lower case first letter Most macro instructions correspond directly to buttons on the Setup screens The instruction name
132. e are shown in the reply In this case Out1 value takes a single floating point instruction in the range 0 1200 Most arguments do not have minimum or maximum values pause list pause float ms s min hr CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 80 SRS The pause instruction requires two arguments 1 a floating point argument with no bounds and 2 one of ms s min or hr instruction help Prints the help text for any instruction that sets a variable The help suffix is not available for program flow instructions such as if while abort and kill if condition instructions while condition instructions else instructions Conditional statements consist of an if or while statement followed by a condition one or more instructions in curly brackets and possibly an e1se clause The condition must be in parentheses if it contains spaces or if it compares two or more values The condition can contain numeric values queries that do not require any arguments and comparison operators lt lt gt and gt The condition can also include or operators and amp amp and operators For example the following causes a macro to wait until temperature In1 is between 39 and 41 degrees while Inl lt 39 Inl gt 40 pause 1 s The pause instruction is not necessary but it helps to reduce the load on
133. e average of ten ADC conversions and have less noise than the values returned by getOutput and channe1 both of which return the result from the single most recent ADC conversion only In addition get Log makes it easier to retrieve data at consistent time intervals For example begin by sending this command which retrieves the last point in channel In 1 s log CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 17 getLog In 1 last 27 53936 Next send the following command getLog In 1 next ZT 95 4345 Each time this command is sent the CTC100 sends the next data point in the log if necessary waiting for a new point to be added Control a temperature The CTC100 can control the temperature of one or more external devices with a resistive heater anda temperature sensor Each of the CTC100 s output channels can use proportional integral differential PID feedback software to monitor a temperature sensor and determine how much power to send to the heater The PID feedback has three adjustable gain factors that determine how much and how quickly the heater power is adjusted if the temperature deviates from its desired value These gain factors must be properly set before the CTC100 can control the temperature of your system Start by plugging the heater and temperature sensor into the CTC100 s back panel The sensor must be in thermal contact with the heater the better the thermal contact is the more precise the tempe
134. e can be any alphanumeric string up to 128 characters long If the program s tab is selected on the program screen the message appears in the Messages area of the program screen If the program was initiated from the remote interface the message is also sent through the same remote interface that was used to transmit the program to the CTC There is no print query redraw Redraws the current top level menu This instruction closes all pop up windows that may have been showing including input windows the Help window windows produced with the popup instruction the PID status window COM port error and history windows and warning message windows There is no redraw query run Macro content Starts a child macro that runs concurrently with the parent macro The child macro runs invisibly in the background any messages that it generates are not printed and the macro has no effect on the OPC and WATI instructions The parent macro continues to run while the child macro runs run should only be used when a child macro needs to run concurrently with the parent macro Otherwise macros should be called as subroutines by including their name in the parent macro without the run instruction standby Puts the CTC100 into standby mode in which the outputs are turned off data acquisition is paused macros are paused the front panel display and system fan are shut off and the system does not respond to remote commands The chassis co
135. e control is set to Custom The use of calibration coefficients can result in more accurate measurements than the preloaded calibration tables In many cases commercial sensors come with these coefficients The values can only be changed if the calibration type is set to Custom and a custom calibration table is not in use CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 63 SRS RTDs If the sensor is an RTD A B C and RO are the constants for the Callendar van Dusen equation The temperature t is calculated from the RTD resistance R based on the following equation R Ro 1 At Bt t 100 Ct below 0 C R Ro 1 At Bt above 0 C Ro is the resistance of the RTD at 0 C expressed in ohms t is the temperature in C When the calibration type is set to IEC751 or US the A B and C settings are automatically changed to the values for that particular calibration and the A B and C controls are greyed out and cannot be modified to modify these values select the Custom calibration type The value of RO however is not preset and can still be modified The Callendar van Dusen equation is not an exact representation of an RTD s characteristics but is accurate to about 50 mK in the range 200 400 C In contrast class A commercial RTDs that have not been individually calibrated are accurate to 150 mK at 0 C and 950 mK at 400 C If you are calibrating your own sensor and the c
136. e is in use If you are using a calibrated Lake Shore sensor the CTC100 will accept the dat calibration file included with the sensor Just change the name of the file to the name of the channel plus the extension txt for example In 1 txt copy the file into the cal directory of your USB stick and plug the USB stick into the CTC100 To verify that a particular file has loaded display the Select screen by pressing the Select menu key If a channel uses a custom calibration the upper left corner of its button is clipped For more details select the relevant channel press the channel menu key and look in the Cal column The Type button should read custom and a Details button should appear at the bottom of the column Press the Details button to view the first three and last three calibration points or a message describing why the calibration data could not be read Each time a USB device is plugged into the CTC100 the CTC100 searches the Cal directory and loads any calibration tables found there into RAM If the USB device is unplugged the calibration tables remain in RAM However if the CTC100 is switched off all calibration tables in RAM are lost Therefore once a custom calibration table is loaded it remains in effect until one of the following occurs CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 23 SRS The instrument is turned off or rebooted Once this occurs t
137. e the autotuner is started the temperature must be stable If the system hasn t been tuned before the easiest way to get a stable temperature is to let the system sit undisturbed for a long period of time with the heater off On the other hand if the PID gains have been set before and just need to be re optimized it may be easier to turn the feedback loop on and let the feedback stabilize the temperature The autotuner can be started with the feedback either on or off Disable or enable derivative feedback Because derivative feedback has a tendency to amplify sensor noise it may sometimes be preferable to disable it If the derivative feedback gain is set to zero before autotuning begins derivative feedback is disabled and the autotuner calculates P and I feedback gains leaving the derivative feedback set to zero In contrast if the derivative feedback gain is initially nonzero the autotuner calculates P I and D feedback gains using a more aggressive algorithm Therefore setting D to a nonzero value the exact value doesn t matter before autotuning produces faster acting feedback but more noise If your temperature sensor is noisy or you re not using a lowpass filter leave D set to zero Set the step size and lag time Two controls on the channel setup screen help the CTC100 to separate the effect of the heater from random temperature fluctuations Step Y controls how much the CTC100 increases the heater output and Lag contr
138. e topmost directory of the USB device under the name autorun txt This macro automatically runs each time the USB device is plugged into the CTC100 The USB storage device should have a FAT16 or preferably a FAT32 format The number of extraneous files should be kept to a minimum since a directory structure with large numbers of files can affect the CTC100 s performance GPIB CTC100 units can be ordered with or without a GPIB port If GPIB is requested it replaces the RS 232 port Although any standard GPIB cable can be used due to space restrictions a single ended cable such as a National Instruments X5 cable is recommended No more than three GPIB cables should be stacked on a single GPIB connector and no more than 14 devices can be connected to a single GPIB interface The total length of all GPIB cables must not exceed 2 meters per instrument or 20 meters whichever is less Ethernet Remote commands can be sent to the CTC100 s Ethernet interface via telnet port 23 The IP address and subnet mask must be set before the Ethernet interface can be used It s not necessary to connect to your building s network to use an Ethernet connection the CTC100 can be connected directly to your computer A special crossover cable may be needed for some older PCs but in general a standard Cat 5 cable can be used Follow the following procedure to test an Ethernet connection 1 Connect the CTC100 to your computer with a standard Cat5 Etherne
139. ea tu acs LA LEE 120 Special MENU MP T RR ARGA 122 Command line and macro instructions ccccccesccesccsseesecssecssceseesscessceseesscesscessessceseesseenes 124 Circuit description 127 Parts List SRS CPU DO ales P 127 Backplanevdindcanatauddanchasascsaian ten dd an on RO EAT AI RI i diet 128 weojamephl e EE 130 GPIB carde e eDnUnIUPORUnURUPDRURD E DU 130 Sensor IDpUt Cards a e AA A E 130 Heater driver cards iate Detrea giro noinine aaa 131 Toon leraPAGEo ros IEEE 132 Digital O card e 133 Chassis CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Contents CPU Card aiam anom tdi oim nin pa RT Eee 136 Backplane ciae itt du IURE UR UU nite du IU IU Idas 139 brontparielztet met nmm etna nnm d mtt e ertt 142 GPIB ON onsec ARRA UM DA 143 2 channel thermistor RTD diode reader sss 144 TOOWV DDG OUT DUE cadre iste acoEooCUIeDUSSOHUPOPUUDDUEDOSU UNUS 148 PAO SAS Chee m 151 Digital I O cafdo PEPEP 153 Schematics 157 SRS CTC 00 Programmable Temperature Controller Safety and Preparation for Use v Safety and preparation for use Line voltage The CTC100 operates from an 88 to 264 VAC power source having a line frequency between 47 and 63 Hz Power entry module A power entry module labeled AC POWER on the back panel of the CTC
140. ed instruction argument instruction argument Instructions and arguments are normally separated by spaces If an instruction contains spaces the spaces can just be omitted but if an argument contains spaces the argument must be enclosed in parentheses or quotation marks Parentheses can be nested but quotation marks cannot Two quotation marks in a row before an instruction results in an empty instruction assembly error These two instructions are equivalent popup Hello world popup Hello world If an argument doesn t contain any spaces it doesn t have to be enclosed in quotes or parentheses popup Hello Whitespace can be included before or after parentheses or quotes but is not necessary instructions 1 A group of instructions can be repeated by enclosing it in square brackets and placing the number of repetitions after the right bracket print Hello pause 1 s print world pause 1 s 3 CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 79 ASRS Whitespace is not necessary before or after square brackets If the left bracket is omitted all instructions from the beginning of the macro to the right bracket are repeated If the right bracket is omitted all instructions after the left bracket do not run A negative number after the right bracket causes the group of instructions to repeat indefinitely Therefore print Hello pause 1 s 1 is equivalent to while 1 print Hello pause 1 s
141. ed Multiplexer U210 shunts the excitation current through either D200 or U233 D200 adds a 300 mV offset ensuring that the voltages at the inputs of op amps U260A D are above the minimum value Current is shunted through U233 when the 30x gain circuit is enabled it adds a 2 5V offset ADC input buffers These op amps isolate the signal and reference resistors from the current produced or drawn by the ADC input pins The buffers are equipped with RC networks that allow them to drive 1 uF capacitors Multiplexers U250A B activate a 30x gain circuit used when necessary to keep the reference voltage above the 100 mV minimum required by the ADC The gain applies to both the signal and the reference voltage Compensate for current direction When reverse current is selected a multiplexer ensures that the voltage at the ADC s REF pin is more positive than the voltage at the REF pin The multiplexer creates a significant voltage drop because it has a 4 ohm resistance and the ADC s REF and REF pins draw a few microamps of current To compensate for this voltage drop the feedback network of each ADC input buffer is connected through the multiplexer to a point as close as possible to the actual ADC input pins ADC a 24 bit delta sigma ADC the LTC2440 s input range is 0 5 Vref 0 5 Vref where Vref is the difference between the voltages at pins ref and ref Temperature sensor U140 reports the temperature of the board s analog section and is
142. edback is inactive and the output can be controlled with the Value button On PID feedback actively controls the heater output ideally maintaining the input channel at the setpoint Follow the output mirrors the input channel A gain and offset can be applied see Zero pt and Gain below There is no PID feedback in follow mode Setpoint Channel PID Setpoint 0 0 The Setpoint is the temperature at which the PID feedback tries to keep the input channel The setpoint is expressed in the same units as the input channel Zero pt Follow mode only Gain Follow mode only Channel PID ZeroPt 0 0 Channel PID Gain 0 0 These controls are only available when the PID Mode is set to Follow In follow mode heater power is directly controlled by one of the CTC100 s inputs rather than by a feedback loop or from the front panel The Zero Point and Gain settings allow the user to scale the output The heater output is given by the following equation Output Input Zero pt Gain Note that the output is zero when the input is equal to the zero point Ramp Channel PID Ramp 0 0 This button is used to set the ramp rate in degrees per second controlling how quickly the CTC100 heats or cools your system When the user changes the setpoint the CTC100 gradually adjusts the ramp temperature see the description of the Ramp T control below increasing or decreasing it at the ramp rate until it reaches the new setpoint The PID fee
143. een the entries on each line HTML files are useful because they are easily viewed and are also easily imported into many application programs however this format should only be used for short datasets less than a thousand points because HTML browsers are very slow when displaying large tables Within an HTML table the first cell of each record see Log File Structure above is highlighted in yellow indicating that either 1 the logging rate was changed 2 the sensor was disconnected for at least 100 log points and then reconnected or 3 the user stopped and then restarted logging for example by touching the USB logging indicator If the Binary output format is selected the output files are written in the CTC log format the same format as the input files Use this format if you d like to open resampled files in FileGrapher One output file is produced for each input file and the output files have the same names as the input files Use the Output file field to specify the directory in which the output files should be saved since they have the same names the output files must be saved in a different directory than the input files The Timestamp setting is ignored when binary output files are produced Timestamp When converting data to a text or HTML file this setting determines how the time of each data point is recorded Date and Time records the time to the nearest second in the format March 26 2000 6
144. el V1 to host the PID feedback loop Set the IO type of channel V1 to Meas out then configure channel V1 s PID loop with the appropriate input sensor and temperature setpoint Set the IO type of analog I O channel A to Set out or Meas out and disable channel AIO A s PID feedback loop Next run the following macro which sets AIO A to the square root of channel V1 each time an ADC conversion occurs waitForSample x V1 x 0 5 AIOA x 1 1 Control instrument functions with the digital IO lines This macro enables the feedback for channel Out 1 whenever bit 0 of the digital I O is high and disables the feedback whenever the bit is low The program runs indefinitely SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming _110 start with the feedback turned off Out1 PID mode off this loop repeats indefinitely while 1 wait for DIO bit 0 to go high then turn feedback on while DIO amp 0x01 0 pause 0 25 s Outl PID mode manual wait for DIO bit 0 to go low then turn feedback off while DIO amp 0x01 1 pause 0 25 s Out1 PID mode off The next macro lets DIO bit 1 control which temperature sensor serves as the input for channel Out 1 s feedback loop x DIO x amp 2 if bit 1 is clear and the PID input channel is not In 1 set the PID input channel to In 1 if x 0 amp amp Outl PID input In 1 Outl PID input In 1 if bit 1 is se
145. en the word Channe1 appears it should be replaced with the name of a data channel like 1n1 If an argument is enclosed in quotation marks and contains spaces it must be enclosed in quotes or parentheses If the argument doesn t contain any spaces the quotes can be omitted Miscellaneous instructions ASRS abort Stops the macro This instruction only affects its parent macro Use the ki11 instruction to stop other concurrently running macros description Writes a string similar to the following to the I O port CTC100 Cryogenic Temperature Controller version 0 135 S N 92001 It s not necessary to use a question mark with this instruction getLog xyl reset v channel time Gets a data point from the log The first argument is the name of a channel The second argument is one of the following The desired time of the data point in milliseconds since 1970 If the time is not available in the log the point at the closest available time is returned first to get the oldest point in the log last to get the most recent point in the log next to get the point after the one that get Log last fetched from the channel If the next point has not been acquired yet the CTC100 waits for it to be acquired If get Log has not been used on this channel since the CTC100 was turned on or since getLog reset was last issued the last point in the log is returned If the xy option is added to the instruction both the time i
146. endently for each channel or globally for all channels 0 001 C F K V A W etc if 1000 lt displayed value lt 1000 6 significant figures otherwise Single step response or relay tuning with conservative moderate and aggressive response targets 320 X 240 pixel color touchscreen numeric and graphical data displays Upper and lower temperaturelimits or rate of change limits can be set on each channel If exceeded an audio alarm and a relay closure occur USB Ethernet and RS 232 optional GPIB IEEE488 2 10 A 88 to 132 VAC or 176 to 264 VAC 47 to 63 Hz or DC 8 5 X 5 X 16 WHL 13 lbs One years parts and labor on defects in material and workmanship Thermistor diode and RTD inputs Inputs Connectors Thermistors Range Excitation current 100 range 300 range 100 0 range 300 Q range 1 kO range 3 kQ range 10 kO range 30 kO range 100 kO range 300 kO range 2 5 MO range Initial accuracy 100 range 300 range 100 0 range 300 Q range 1 kQ range 3 kQ range 10 kO range 30 kO range 100 kO range 300 kO range 2 5 MO range Four inputs for 2 wire or 4 wire thermistor diode or RTD Two 9 pin D sub sockets 0 10 30 100 3000 1 3 10 30 100 300 kQ 2 5 MQ or auto 1 mA 300 uA 100 pA 30 uA 10 pA 3 yA 1 uA 300 nA 100 nA 30nA 1 uA 0 007 Q 0 03 0 0 07 0 0 25 0 0 6 0 20 60 250 1500 1kO 3 kQ Typical drift due to temperature at midrange 100 range 0 00020
147. ent should be provided and the CTC100 replies with the current value of the setting The reply also appears on the Program screen if the appropriate tab is selected For example Out 1 value 5 sets the value of channel Out 1 to 5 watts The equals sign is optional and everything is case insensitive Since the channel name Out 1 has a space the instruction has to be in quotes or it will be interpreted as two separate instructions The argument must be outside the quotes CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 78 SRS To reduce the need for quotes spaces can be omitted from instructions For example Out 1 10 type meas out is equivalent to Outl IOtype meas out Spaces cannot be omitted from arguments The command Out 1l value 1 increases the value of channel Out 1 by 1 watt The equals sign and the spaces before and after the are optional This command Out l value 1 decreases the value of channel Out 1 by 1 watt while the query Out l value is a request for the value of channel Out 1 Inl lopass 1 Since the lowpass filter setting must be chosen from a list of possible values 1 s 3 s 10 s etc this instruction sets the filter to the next setting on the list rather than incrementing the lowpass time constant by one second For example if the filter setting was 3 s it would be 10 s after the above remote command was issu
148. ep response autotuning Step Y is 2 W Lag is 30 s feedback is initially off and the system starts at room temperature After the step response is complete the feedback turns on and the temperature drops before stabilizing at the 30 C setpoint The step response tuner makes a single change to the amount of power delivered to the heater and measures how much and how quickly the temperature changes in response The step response tuner begins by disabling the feedback if the feedback was on and measuring the drift and noise of the feedback input in the absence of any changes to the output The drift and noise measurement takes one third the period specified with the Lag control the resulting drift and noise value is the difference between the largest and smallest input signal during this time Next the step response tuner increases the output by the value specified with the Step Y control The tuner then waits for the amount of time specified with the Lag control If during this period the feedback input does not change by at least ten times the drift and noise value an error message is displayed in the Status window and tuning is cancelled If this occurs either 1 ensure that the temperature is stable before starting the step response or 2 increase step Y or 3 if it looks like the temperature didn t have enough time to respond increase the Lag time The tuner continuously measures the rate of temperature change
149. er A tute E e HE anaeazetizs 7 Relays digital I O and virtual channels eese 7 Operation lI Quick start t torialssssseiississosisosisoierscssosisonisoissanss aaien iseia Ese e dose Nee VN PES ETE STEP E NUS assesi 12 TUPI ANS TMSEMU MEME OMe cdes ts 12 Eleg E E 12 Configure the sensor INPUTS isipin ripi arnari tenre i Eo a e Ea O arai TEAR aarti tai 12 If the sensor reading does not appear sse 13 HDi d GN 13 i RecjateatswelU d 01 cceprereenrererrrere ter E Oen UU EE 14 Setthe data loggirip rate zoe Unde nr eri n eden hii eie 14 Save data to and retrieve data from a USB memory device sse 15 Interface with COmpUt6eE nnn ette etn dr n Pr a e P ER o iens I5 Control a temperature u c ue E eee esee e eed NA ere eeu IE i RENE eI REIR 17 Acquiring and logging data ccccsscssssscscsscsssscscsscscsessssssescssosssesscsssscssssnssenes 22 Input TIRES ss 265 it tive H P P 22 Custom calibration t bles 2 arteria terrere tritt rer pari ep a raagis en 22 Virtual ch nriels 42 5 5 ace Soca Sees Sa esr evap rro repe rere re rdi rrr i s 24 Logging data to USB ciere ose edle ed Hoe pedir eie t dede edente eds den eee conde 25 ADC sampling and logged data eseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeteenntetn tenerent tenntnene nens 25 Format of CTC 100 sr EP 26 BLDEQZLC
150. er and start a second program while the first program is still running Program 3 T Prog rogram print hello Save Delete Prom program pause 1 000 s Input program print world program print hello program p Program pause 1 000 s 2 3 gt hello gt world gt hello gt world When the program is done the messages hello and world should appear three times in the Messages window Once the program has finished it s possible to press the start button to run the program again the Save button to save the program or the Clear button to erase the program and the Messages window Running concurrent macros A macro can run for a long period of time or even indefinitely Therefore it s possible to start a new macro before the previous macro has finished It s also possible to run multiple instances of a saved macro simultaneously The CTC can run up to ten concurrent macros started from the front panel If an eleventh macro is started a Too many macros assembly error is generated and the macro does not run When the CTC100 is turned on it looks for a macro named startup and if it exists runs the macro Any other macros that might have been running when the CTC100 was switched off are not re started Press the Setup key to configure the CTC100 The Setup screen has between 1 and 5 blue tabs at the top depending on how many channels are selected Touch the System
151. erature the P I and D feedback gains and the input channel By default zone 1 is selected and contains the current values of these parameters the rest of the table is empty Touch one of the parameter cells to modify its value If a particular set of parameters is no longer needed touch its zone number in the Delete column to clear the entries for that location r Delete Min P I _D 1 10 00 4 997 0 576 10 84 25 00 5 483 0 675 11 14 35 00 4 454 0 407 12 10 The PID zone editor CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 68 SRS To manually select a zone touch the Zone button and select one of the zone numbers 1 8 The feedback parameters immediately change to the values stored in the corresponding row of the Zone table If the selected zone contains empty cells the feedback parameters don t change and are copied into the empty cells Whenever the feedback parameters change for example if the feedback is tuned the selected zone is automatically updated with the new values To have the CTC100 automatically select zones based on the temperature assign each zone a minimum temperature using the Min column of the memory table The min temperatures can be in any order they do not have to be monotonically ascending or descending Next set the zone to Auto The CTC100 automatically selects the zone with the largest Min value that is less than the ramp temperatur
152. et at least one alarm if your heater can output enough power to damage your system The alarm should be configured to disable the heater output when triggered For additional protection the heater output can be routed through one of the CTC100 s relays and the relay associated with the alarm Without such a safety mechanism it s possible for the CTC100 to CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 60 enter a runaway feedback condition if a sensor becomes unplugged or malfunctions or if the PID feedback is incorrectly set up Status Channel Alarm Status Off On Indicates if an alarm condition is currently present on this channel If a latching alarm has been triggered touch the Status control and set its status to Off to turn the alarm off This control can also be used to artificially turn the alarm on to test the sound output channel disabling and GPIB status reporting To test an alarm enable the alarm with the Mode control and then set its Status to On The alarm immediately turns on If the alarm is non latching it turns off in less than a second if it is latching it stays on until the Status is set to Off The Lag setting has no effect on this test Mode Channel Alarm Mode Off Level Rate s Off the alarm never sounds Level the alarm sounds whenever the channel s value exceeds the alarm Min and Max The alarm also sounds whenever the input is disconnected or the sensor value exceeds the
153. eter 1N5232 5 6V 500 mW DO 35 ZENER DIODE High precision 10 volt reference LM34DM TEMP SENSOR 74 HCO8 Quad 2 Input AND Gate 74HC138 3 to 8 line decoder demultiplexer inverting 74HC595 8 Bit Serial Input Parallel Output Shift Register HC595 8 Bit Serial Input Parallel Output Shift Register HC595 8 Bit Serial Input Parallel Output Shift Register HC595 8 Bit Serial Input Parallel Output Shift Register 78M05 TL431C Adjustable Shunt Voltage Regulator 100 mA SOT23 5 TL431C Adjustable Shunt Voltage Regulator 100 mA SOT23 5 TL431C Adjustable Shunt Voltage Regulator 100 mA SOT23 5 TL431C Adjustable Shunt Voltage Regulator 100 mA SOT23 5 CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 145 D208 D501 D502 D503 D504 D505 D506 D507 D508 ISO310 ISO311 150330 D641 D741 U620 U720 U650 U750 U270 U640 U740 u120 Uu290 U590 U210 U250 U281 U510 U550 U581 U110 U260 U560 U230 U530 U630 U670 U730 U770 U410 U420 U660 U760 U280 U580 R641 R741 R633 x N Ww Ww BEES SSeeS Sean E EE w o NR 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 01320 3 01320 3 01357 3 01357 3 01386 3 01386 3 01398 3 01398 3 01469 3 01469 3 01469 3 01498 3 01500 3 01500 3 01695 3 01695 3 01695 3 01695 3 01695 3 01695 3 01696 3 01900 3 01900 3 01941 3 01941 3 01941 3 01941 3 01941 3 01941 3 01944 3 01944 3 01945 3 01945 3 01963 3 01963 4 00016 4 000
154. eturns a single comma separated string containing the units of all channels group 1 Changes the channel selection group The group must be a number between 1 and 4 inclusive lasttouch Indicates how many seconds have elapsed since the user last touched the touchscreen or pushed a button If the user has not touched the touchscreen or a button since the CTC was turned on the return value indicates how many seconds have elapsed since the CTC100 finished booting menu Select Channels Show Data Program Setup Help Output Enable menu 1 Makes the CTC100 behave as if one of the front panel buttons has been pressed The argument can be the name of a front panel button or a numeric value between 1 and 6 inclusive 1 for Select Channels 2 for Show Data etc Menu 1 advances the CTC100 to the next menu issuing the Menu 1 instruction while the Setup menu is showing brings up the Select Channels menu not Help outputEnable on off Enables outputEnable on or disables outputEnable off all heater outputs and 10V analog outputs Issuing this instruction is the same as pressing the Output Enable button but no pop up window appears and the user doesn t have to confirm that the outputs should be enabled selectNone Deselects all channels in all selection groups systemtime month day year hours minutes systemtime dmy day month year systemtime hms hours minutes seconds systemtime mdy month da
155. ever the temperature becomes too high or low for the sensor to measure On the Setup screen for channel In 1 under the Alarm heading set the options as follows CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 19 Mode Set to on to enable the alarm Latch Set to no A latching alarm once triggered must be turned off manually Sound 1 beep Output select the heater output channel Whatever channel you select will be forced to zero whenever the alarm is beeping Relay For the best possible security the output should be routed through one of the four relays A B C or D and the Relay button should be set to A B C or D accordingly The relay will physically disconnect the heater whenever the alarm is beeping Min Should be set well below the lowest temperature that could normally be observed the min setting should only be exceeded if something is wrong with the sensor Max Set to the upper temperature limit of your system Lag Set to 1 s This will prevent small glitches such as those caused by autoranging from triggering the alarm Configure the PID feedback loop The next step is to tell the instrument which temperature sensor to control and the desired temperature of that sensor Make sure the Channel screen is still visible Touch the Out 1 tab to bring up the setup screen for channel Out 1 In the first PID column touch the Input button Then on the list of channels that a
156. evious values In certain cases it may be desirable to have the CTC100 power up with the outputs enabled to ensure that the feedback loops automatically resume after a power failure Such behavior can be implemented with a startup macro see the Startup macros section The Output Enable key is not intended to prevent electric shocks When handling exposed heater wires always disconnect the wires from the CTC100 or unplug the CTC100 from the wall CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 40 Press and hold the Output Enable key for 3 seconds to put the CTC100 into standby mode In standby mode the outputs are turned off data acquisition and macros are paused the front panel display and system fan are shut off and the system does not respond to remote commands RTD excitation currents are still on and an internal cooling fan may switch on occasionally Press the Output Enable key again to leave standby mode There is no remote command for entering or exiting standby mode Select Channels screen In I In 2 etc Channel selected on off Each of the green buttons on the Select Channels screen represents one I O channel The buttons are arranged in roughly the same order as the connectors on the back of the CTC100 Each button shows the channel s name and current value If no sensor or heater is connected the value may be blank 1 Group 1 7 input 5 Output
157. example the heater has become disconnected or the output s compliance voltage has been exceeded The default setting is Meas out Plot Channel Plot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Indicates which plot this channel will appear in when the Plot screen is showing the plot type is Custom see the Plot Screen section above and the channel is selected on the Select screen Choose one of eight plots for the channel to appear in where plot 1 is the uppermost plot If no channels are assigned to a given plot the plot won t appear on the Plot screen For example if all selected channels are assigned to plot 4 plot 4 will occupy the entire Custom plot screen Logging Channel Logging Off 0 1 s 0 3 s 1 s 3 s 10 s 30 s 1 min 3 min 10 min 30 min 1 hr Default j By default each channel s value is written to the log at a global log rate that is set from the System Setup screen System Log Interval The Logging button makes it possible to override the global log rate for individual channels SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 66 SRS Setup screen for channels Out and Out 2 PID column Input Channel PID Input Input channel This setting determines which the temperature sensor the PID feedback loop tries to regulate It s possible to use one temperature sensor as the input for more than one PID loop Mode Channel PID Mode Off On Follow Off PID fe
158. f X divisions controls the number of vertical gridlines The value entered is approximate the program may draw slightly more or fewer gridlines in order to put the gridlines on round time values Number of Y divisions controls the number of horizontal gridlines The value entered is approximate the program may draw slightly more or fewer gridlines in order to put the gridlines on round Y values Y axis label The text entered here is displayed to the left of the graph Annotation The text entered here is displayed inside the plot area Enter the string names to display a list of the plotted files each shown in the color in which it is plotted Annotation position Controls where on the plot the annotation appears The following options appear when the More options button is clicked Subtract baseline if checked baseline data is subtracted from every plot in the graph To set the baseline data display a graph and select Set as baseline from the Edit menu Subtract average if checked each trace is offset such that its average value is 0 Y offset between traces can be used to separate traces that are on top of each other One times this constant is added to trace 2 two times this constant is added to trace 3 three times this constant is added to trace 4 and so on Colors the colors used in the graph can be defined in this section Each color is a set of three numbers between 0 and 255 for red green and blue brig
159. for more information on using these instructions Channel Tune Lag 0 0 Channel Tune StepY 0 0 These parameters provide the PID autotuners with initial guesses of the system s response magnitude and time Channe1 Tune StepY controls the height of the step response or relay disturbance while Channe1 Tune Lag determines how long the tuner waits before it first evaluates the effect of the disturbance If either value is too small the autotuning algorithm will be CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 105 Error codes ASRS susceptible to noise The Y step size should be high enough to produce a temperature rise of several degrees and the lag should be long enough for the temperature to rise noticeably Errors Attempting to set step Y or Lag when no PID input channel is selected results in a run time locked parameter error Channel Tune Mode Off Auto Step Relay Starts or stops PID autotuning Step starts the step response tuning algorithm Relay starts the relay tuning algorithm In Auto mode the CTC100 begins a step response if the PID output is less than half of Channel Tune StepY otherwise it begins the relay tuning procedure Off cancels any PID autotuning that s currently in progress Channel Tune Type Cons Moderate Aggr Auto Determines how the PID tuner sets the feedback gains Cons results in slow feedback response rates with little overshoot of the setpoint Aggr results in fa
160. ful If you don t see a message press the Channel gt Tune gt Status button to see it Tuning was cancelled because the response was less than 10 times the noise and drift This message indicates that the heater produced an insufficient temperature response It can result from any of the following factors CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 37 SRS The temperature was not stable before the autotuner was started or the temperature was changed by some external factor after the autotuner was started In particular after running the autotuner it s necessary to wait for the temperature to re stabilize before running the autotuner again The autotuner disturbance size Step Y was not large enough to create a noticable change in the temperature The autotuner wait time Lag was not long enough for the heater to change the temperature To determine the source of the problem look at a dual plot with the heater output on one plot and the sensor temperature on the other Make sure that the temperature was stable before the heater turned on and that it changed significantly after the heater was turned on Autotuning was cancelled because the PID mode was set to Off The user turned off PID feedback while the tuner was running The tuner is unable to run when PID feedback is turned off Autotuning was cancelled because the PID mode was set to Follow The user changed the PID mode to Follow after aut
161. ged the last hour of data can still be displayed on the Plot screen Do not unplug a USB device or switch the CTC100 off while USB logging is enabled Either of these actions causes loss of data and corruption of the device s file system If the USB logging triangle is white always touch it and wait for it to become greyed out before unplugging the USB device or turning the CTC100 off If a USB device is unplugged while data is being logged to it repair the device by inserting it into a PC and running a check disk program Periodic defragmentation is also recommended since the process of continuously appending data to multiple log files results in highly fragmented drives ADC sampling and logged data SRS The CTC100 has two different sampling rate settings one controls how often data is acquired and another controls how often it s stored AID rate The analog to digital conversion or A D rate controls how often a data point is acquired for each channel All channels are read at the same rate which by default is 100 ms 10 samples per second The A D rate mainly affects the performance of feedback loops the faster the A D rate is the more quickly the PID loops can respond to changing temperatures the slower the A D rate the less noise there is By default the A D conversion process is synchronized with the AC line voltage and the A D rate can only be set to multiples of the AC line period For example if the rate is set to 100 ms
162. grees waitForRamp wait for the ramp to finish pause 1 min wait for 1 minute Outl PID setpoint 80 waitForRamp pause 1 min Outl PID ramp 0 disable ramping Outl PID setpoint 0 The equals signs are optional and are shown for clarity If this macro is entered from the Program screen the channel and program prefixes must be included channel Outl PID ramp 1 channel Outl PID setpoint 100 program waitForRamp program pause 1 min channel Outl PID setpoint 80 program waitForRamp program pause 1 min channel Outl PID ramp O0 channel Outl PID setpoint 0 This is the most straightforward way to implement a temperature profile However it doesn t work if two or more PID feedback loops are ramping at the same time because waitForRamp actually waits for all setpoint ramps to end whether or not they were started by the macro A more elaborate version eliminates this issue by comparing the current value of the ramp Outl PID rampT with the endpoint of the ramp Out1 PID setpoint SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 108 Outl PID ramp 1 Outl PID setpoint 100 while Outl PID rampT Outl PID setpoint pause 1 s pause 1 min Outl PID setpoint 80 while Outl PID rampT Outl PID setpoint pause 1 s pause 1 min Outl PID ramp 0 Outl PID setpoint 0 A third option is to wait for the measured temperature to reach the endpoint of the ramp O
163. h annotationPosition sets the position of the annotation to top left bottom center etc set antialiasing on or off off by default sets automatic X and Y axis scaling on or off on by default set the number of X and Y grid lines break buffer at marks positive negative marks only clear the plot then plot the indicated n buffers clears the indicated mark use drawMarks to see mark numbers clears all stored marks remove all buffers from the plot make a copy of a buffer crop sourceBuffer to the time segment currently visible on the plot set the current directory divide one buffer by another buffer buffer buffer2 divide a buffer by its average divide by constant buffer buffer constant draws a vertical red line on the plot at the location of each stored mark set the size of the font used to label the graph axes hide tick marks subtract the average slope from a buffer set the width of the plot option p grid g and or axis a lines in pixels load a file into a new buffer specify a name for the buffer and the name of the file to load lowpass filter a buffer specify the time constant in seconds stores marks that indicate when the specified buffer enters a level plus or minus a tolerance median filter a buffer moves the indicated mark use drawMarks to see mark numbers forward 0 0 seconds multiply two buffers buffer buffer buffer2 multiply by constant buffer buffer constant normali
164. he PID input signal at time t and T is the ADC sampling time Thus larger values of P I or D produce a faster feedback response Increasing P or I tends to create oscillations while increasing D reduces oscillations but adds noise Negative values of P I and D should be used if the output drives a fan or other device that cools the sample Errors Attempting to set P I or D when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error Attempting to set I or D when the PID mode is set to Follow also produces a run time locked parameter error Attempting to set P when the PID mode is set to Follow produces an assembly time Unrecognized instruction error Channel PID Ffwd Channel name Selects a feedforward input channel If a valid channel is selected and the PID mode is set to on the value the value of the feedforward channel is added to the PID output at each ADC conversion To disable this feature issue the channel f fwd instruction with an empty argument This feature can be used to implement feedforward control The feedforward input should be some quantity with a known and predictable effect on the feedback system The feedforward channel s cal offset and cal gain controls can be used to scale the feedforward effect Channel PID Gain 0 0 Channel PID ZeroPt 0 0 These instructions set the offset and gain for Follow mode They are only available when the PID mode of Channe1 is set to Fol
165. he custom calibration table must be reloaded from the USB device for example by leaving the device plugged in when the instrument is turned back on A USB device with a different calibration file is plugged into the CTC100 The calibration type set with the Channel Cal Type button is changed to standard The following actions have no effect on custom calibration tables Unplugging the USB device with the calibration tables while the CTC100 is turned on e Plugging in a USB device that does not contain a calibration file for the channel It can take several seconds for the CTC100 to recognize a USB device Therefore when an instrument is turned on with a USB device plugged in the default calibration may remain in effect for several seconds before the custom calibration is loaded Calibration table format A calibration table is an ASCII text file containing a units declaration followed by pairs of numeric values For example here is a calibration table for a 1000 platinum RTD units C 0 100 00 103 90 107 79 lil1 67 115 54 119 40 123 24 127 08 130 90 134 71 138 51 oo OO O OC GO NON ON GM GM ON GM GN GS oS CO 000 JovU015 0 ho Dp nd Units declaration The first line indicates which units this channel will be displayed in once the calibration table is loaded This line is optional if it s omitted the units are assumed to be Kelvins The units can be any string of 4 or fewer char
166. he hash character defines a variable and assigns it a floating point value The value can then be queried with 4 variable and can also be used as an argument for any instruction that takes a numeric argument The variable instruction consists of a hash 77 immediately followed by a variable name The variable name can be any string up to 32 characters long but spaces are not allowed within the variable name or between the pound sign and the variable name Variable names are not case sensitive For example x 10 2 dx CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 8l ASRS e o defines a variable x and sets its value to 10 2 then queries the value of x The equals sign is optional Variables can be used by the macro in which they are defined by any macros called by that macro and by the macro that called it A macro cannot access variables defined by other concurrently running macros In addition once a macro finishes all variables defined by the macro are deleted The value of an undefined variable is zero When macros are sent over a serial port as opposed to being loaded from a text file on a USB storage device the macro can have at most one line and therefore all variables must be defined and used on a single line Therefore if the command xX 10 2 is sent over the serial port and at a later time the command Tx is sent over the serial port the response is 0 because the CTC runs each
167. he primary GPIB address The address must be a value between 0 and 30 inclusive but in most GPIB systems 0 is reserved for the controller in charge and should not be used Verbose System COM Verbose Low Medium High Determines how the CTC100 responds to RS 232 USB GPIB and Telnet messages Low the CTC100 only sends messages in response to queries This mode should be selected for IEEE488 2 compatibility Medium the CTC100 also sends error messages whenever a command could not be understood Error messages always begin with the word Error CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 53 High the CTC100 also sends messages whenever a parameter is set Messages include the name of the parameter that was set or queried Example responses are shown in the table below Verbose Response to instruction level 2A Xyz invalid instruction 2A 37 47 Low 37 4722 no response no response Medium 37 4722 Error xyz is not a valid instruction no response High 2A Value 37 4722 Error xyz is not a valid instruction 2A Value 37 47 History System COM History Pressing this button brings up a window that that shows the contents of the last twelve messages sent or received over the COM ports The window is helpful for debugging communications issues Errors System COM Errors Pressing this button produces a window that shows the last six errors caused by COM port communications
168. hick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 143 R365 4 01423 4 7 Resistor Thick Film 5 300 ppm SMT R371 4 01495 4 7K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT R374 4 01495 4 7K Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT RN101 4 00911 4 7KX4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN102 4 00905 82X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN103 4 00905 82X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN104 4 00905 82X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN105 4 01707 47KX4D RN202 4 01707 47KX4D RN204 4 00908 270X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny RN205 4 00908 270X4D Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny S201 2 00065 12MM TACT SWITC 8202 2 00065 12MM TACT SWITC 203 2 00065 12MM TACT SWITC 204 2 00065 12MM TACT SWITC 205 2 00065 12MM TACT SWITC S206 2 00065 12MM TACT SWITC U101 3 01497 ATMEGA162 16AI Uu102 3 01498 74ABT16245CMTD U201 3 01215 MAX1234EGI u202 3 00741 74HC04 74HC04 Hex Inverter u203 3 01216 HEF4794BTD u301 3 00939 LM4882M LM4882M AUDIO POWER AMP u360 3 01977 LM317MABDTG u361 3 01977 LM317MABDTG
169. hing or non latching and when triggered can shut off a heater output trip a relay and or create one of four alarm sounds Sensor inputs can be lowpass filtered to reduce noise and or differenced with another channel The rate of change of sensor inputs can be calculated In addition any of the CTC100 s four voltage I O channels can be used to read pre amplified sensor signals 2 powered and 4 unpowered heater outputs The CTC100 has two heater outputs each capable of delivering up to 100W of power to a 25 ohm heater In addition four unpowered voltage I O channels can be used to drive heaters with the help of an external amplifier Up to 6 feedback control loops Each of the heater outputs can be controlled by a PID feedback loop A feedback loop continually adjusts the heater power in order to keep a sensor at a constant temperature Any of the CTC100 s channels can be selected as the input for each feedback loop Feedback time constants can be adjusted between about 200 ms and 10 hours PID feedback parameters can be tuned manually or automatically Depending on the amount of overshoot that is acceptable aggressive moderate or conservative tuning goals can be selected Up to ten sets of PID parameters can be stored for each channel each set of parameters can be assigned a temperature range and automatically recalled when the temperature falls within that range The temperature sensor used for the feedback loop can also be selected ba
170. htness Enter 255 255 255 without the quotes for white and 0 0 0 for black Show tick marks some data files can include tick marks to mark events If the show tick marks box is checked the tick marks are shown as small spikes in the graph Antialias if checked the plot is drawn with antialiased lines This improves the appearance of the graph but also significantly increases the amount of time that it takes to draw the graph Axis linewidth the width of the box surrounding the plot in pixels Grid linewidth the width of the plot gridlines in pixels Plot linewidth the width of the plot traces in pixels Values other than 1 may significantly increase the amount of tie that it takes to draw the graph CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 120 Process menu SRS Show statistics Shows information such as the average minimum and maximum values for all data within the graph s X range Only information for the buffer plotted in black is shown Linear regression The linear regression feature can be used to determine how much one temperature sensor is miscalibrated compared to another You are asked to choose an X and a Y buffer the log files for two different temperature sensors The software then determines the average offset and gain of the X buffer relative to the Y buffer Check the Apply equation to X buffer box to multiply the X buffer by the gain factor and then add the offset
171. ilter replaces each data point with the median value of itself the previous point and the next point Normalize Subtracts a constant from a buffer then multiplies the buffer by another constant such that the minimum value in the buffer is zero and the maximum value is one Revert to saved Re loads a buffer from disk discarding the effects of all operations performed with the Process menu Smooth Removes noise using a sliding window Gaussian filter Smoothing replaces each data point with a weighted average of data acquired before during and after the point Subtract average Subtracts the average value of a buffer from all data points in the buffer Subtract initial Subtracts the value of the first point in a buffer from all data points in the buffer Subtract slope Subtracts the overall slope from a buffer Undo Undoes the last operation performed with the Process menu This menu contains macros that each consist of some combination of operations from the other menus The list of macros is defined in the file Resource SpecialMenu rsc and the individual macros are defined by files in the Resource directory Small plot size Displays a single graph in a 200 x 375 pixel window Medium plot size Restores the default single graph in a 294 x 486 pixel window Large plot size Displays a single graph in a 600 x 1000 pixel window CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 123 Add small header Adds a
172. in CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 32 SRS Temperature C Heater power W Temperature C 75 70 65 71 0 70 5 70 0 69 5 0 04 W C s 12 0 02 W C s 2 0 01 W C s 1 0 001 W C s Minutes Derivative derivative feedback reduces the heater output whenever the temperature is rising rapidly In the example below when the derivative gain D is increased from 3 to 6 W s C the amount of overshoot and oscillation decreases The temperature rise is also a little slower but because there is less oscillation the system stabilizes at 70 C sooner However if the derivative gain is too large it too can produce oscillations because when the temperature is rising rapidly derivative feedback reduces the heater output which causes the temperature to rise more slowly which makes the derivative feedback increase the heater output and so on Heater power W Temperature C With the right amount of derivative feedback we can increase P and to levels that would otherwise cause oscillations and thereby obtain faster more responsive feedback control 70 65 D 3W s C D 6 W s C D 12 W s C 1 2 3 4 5 Minutes CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 33 Automatic tuning algorithms SRS During automatic tuning the CTC100 changes the heater power measures how much and how quickly the
173. in 3 5mm header Maximum current 5A Maximum voltage 250 VAC SRS CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction l Introduction The CTC100 is a high performance cryogenic temperature controller that can monitor and control temperatures with millikelvin resolution Its features include 4 temperature sensor inputs Each of the CTC100 s four temperature inputs can read RTDs thermistors and diodes Each temperature input channel has its own 24 bit ADC with ten input ranges that can be automatically or manually selected By default each sensor is read 10 times per second but the rate can be set as low as 1 Hz or as high as the line frequency 50 or 60 Hz Each input has an independent excitation current source The excitation current is automatically selected based on the input range The direction in which the excitation current flows through the sensor can be reversed to detect EMF errors and the CTC100 can automatically reverse the current direction at every ADC reading and display the average of forward and reverse current readings Standard calibration curves for a variety of sensors are included and custom calibration curves of up to 200 points each can be entered by saving a text file on a USB memory stick and then plugging the memory stick into the CTC100 Calibrations can be adjusted by entering an offset and gain from the front panel Each sensor input has high and low level or rate of change alarms Alarms can be latc
174. in the alarm s mask see the channel alarm mask instruction is also set in the ASE register TRG Trigger command Identical to the Group Execute Trigger GET bus message Causes all channels to read their outputs The amount of time that it takes to process this command is twice the value of the A D rate setting After receiving a trigger command the CTC100 stops automatically acquiring data The inputs are only read and PID feedback loops only update their outputs when a TRG command or a GET message is received PID feedback outputs will not function properly unless the CTC receives TRG commands or GET bus messages at the rate specified with the System Other A D rate instruction To resume automatic sampling set the A D rate using System other A D rate For example System other A D rate 100 sets the CTC100 to automatically sample every 100 milliseconds TST Self test Returns a numeric error code that indicates whether data has been dropped and whether ADC conversions are occurring at the correct rate First two digits number of times ADC data has been dropped because of timing issues or 30 whichever is smaller Third digit the lowest numbered slot from which data was dropped zero if no data has been dropped Fourth and fifth digits ADC conversion rate 00 10096 of the expected value as set by System Other A D rate 01 1019 of expected 99 99 etc A value of 99 or 101 is usually not a pr
175. ing a conversion is also connected to the microcontroller through an optoisolator this signal tells the microcontroller when an ADC conversion is complete and without it the microcontroller freezes up The CTC s eight digital I O DIO lines can be user configured to serve as inputs or outputs All eight lines must have the same direction The DIO lines are presented on a 25 pin D connector J200 Resistors RN200 and RN201 terminate the lines Capacitors C200 C207 provide ESD protection while D200 D202 D204 and D206 provide overvoltage protection The parallel to SPI converter U210 reads the inputs while the SPI to parallel converter U220 produces the outputs When DOUT_EN is high the outputs of U210 are placed into a high impedance state and the DIO lines serve as inputs When DOUT EN is low U210 is enabled and the DIO lines serve as outputs Since the digital I O lines are optically isolated and have a floating ground U210 and U220 are powered by an isolated 5V power supply The DIO card also includes four non latching relays K401 K404 Each relay is double throw Pins 2 3 and 4 serve as a monitoring relay If the monitoring relay fails to switch as expected XOR gates U410 notify the microcontroller by pulling one of OUTIMON OUT2MON etc high CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 135 Chassis assembly 199 ASRS 0 00048 0 00079 0 00120 0 00149 0 00159 0 00167 0 00179 0 00180 0 00185 0 002
176. ing files Only data from the current folder appears on the plot screen The default folder name is which is the root directory of the USB device Log to System Log LogTo RAM USB None USB Data is logged to the USB device and also in the CTC100 s internal memory If the USB device is unplugged the setting automatically changes to RAM RAM Data is only stored in the CTC100 s internal memory There is enough memory to store about an hour of data at the default 1 second log rate Therefore the Plot screen only shows the previous hour of data None the CTC100 does not store any data at all and the plots on the Plot screen are always empty USB System Log USB auto manual This setting determines whether or not the CTC automatically starts logging to USB memory devices when they are plugged in Auto when a USB storage device is plugged into the instrument the CTC immediately starts logging data to it Manual when a USB storage device is plugged into the instrument you must touch the blue triangle in the upper right corner of the screen to begin logging If you unplug the device and plug it back in data will no longer be logged to the device Setup screen System tab COM column RS 232 System COM RS 232 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 230400 Sets the RS 232 baud rate The RS 232 interface always has 8 bits 1 stop bit and no parity GPIB System COM GPIB 1 2 3 30 Sets t
177. ing with external power supplies For applications that require more heater power than the CTC100 can deliver the CTC100 s analog outputs can be used to control a programmable power supply Since the analog input on programmable power supplies usually sets the voltage or current supplied to the heater the temperature rise of the heater roughly depends on the square of the CTC100 s output For example if a 1 V output increases the temperature by 1 degree over ambient a 2 V output would increase the temperature by about 4 degrees As a result you may notice sluggish response at low output values and or feedback oscillations at high outputs Feedback performance can be made more consistent by linearizing the PID output vs temperature response curve One way to linearize the PID output is to apply a custom calibration table to the output channel see page 22 for a description of how to make and upload calibration tables In this case the calibration table is a file containing comma separated data in the format X1 Y1 X2 Y2 where Xn is the analog output in volts to be produced when the PID algorithm requests output Yn To produce such a table experimentally set the analog output to a series of different voltages At each analog IO voltage Xn measure the temperature Yn at which the system stabilizes Another way to linearize the PID output is by using a macro to apply a simple equation to the PID output Use a virtual channel such as chann
178. interface uses an RTS CTS hardware flow control protocol in which the CTC100 pulls pin 8 high to indicate that the PC can send data and low to indicate that the PC should not send data Similarly the CTC100 stops sending data whenever the PC pulls pin 7 low Of the PC serial ports tested at SRS only about half actually supported RTS CTS flow control If your serial port doesn t support RTS CTS the computer may never transmit data to the CTC100 may stop transmitting data after several characters or may never stop transmitting data in which case the CTC100 will drop characters from some received RS 232 messages The Aten Technology UC232A USB to Serial converter cable has been tested and is compatible with the CTC100 USB to serial converters based on the Prolific PL 2303 chip are also compatible The RS 232 interface has no parity 8 bits and 1 stop bit The baud rate can be selected from the System Setup menu USB device port The CTC100 has a single USB 1 1 device interface that can be connected to a PC with a standard USB A to B cable The CTC100 appears on the PC as a COM port and any software that can communicate with an RS 232 port can be used to send remote commands to the CTC100 The USB interface is about as fast as the RS 232 interface at its fastest baud rate 250000 baud When a Windows PC is first connected to the CTC100 s USB interface the PC may display a New Hardware Found dialog In this case the USB driver should be downl
179. ion Plot data The CTC100 boots up with the Select Channels screen showing This screen has one button for each input and output connector on the back panel of the instrument The locations of the buttons on the screen roughly correspond to the locations of the connectors on the back panel In addition there are buttons for three virtual channels V1 V3 that do not correspond to back panel connectors To plot data 1 On the Select screen touch the buttons for the channels to be plotted The buttons should change to a lighter color indicating that the channels are selected If any other channels are selected touch their buttons to de select them 2 Press the Show Data key on the CTC100 s front panel The Show Data screen has four blue tabs at the top that control the type of display Single all selected channels are plotted together on a single graph Multiple each selected channel is plotted in its own graph Ponytail all selected channels are plotted together on a single graph and the traces are offset such that each channel starts at zero SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 14 Custom selected channels are assigned to plots with the Plot button on the channel setup screen described on page 65 Numeric a numeric value is displayed for each selected channel To zoom in touch anywhere within the right half of the plot To zoom out touch the left half of the plot but not
180. is possible to set the channel s value from the front panel or by sending a remote command However PID feedback functionality is only available if the channel is an output while alarm and calibration functions are only available if the channel is an input Casc Channel PID Casc Output channel Cascade control A cascade control system consists of two or more PID loops As in a normal PID system a primary PID loop monitors a temperature that needs to be regulated the primary temperature However instead of driving the physical output heater valve etc the output of the primary loop becomes the setpoint for a secondary PID loop The secondary loop monitors a secondary temperature reading and controls the physical output The secondary temperature reading is typically a temperature that is not in and of itself critical to the application but responds more quickly to the control output than the primary reading For example the temperature of an incubator might need to be kept constant using a forced air heater In this case the primary temperature is the air temperature inside the incubator while the secondary temperature might be the temperature of the hot air entering the incubator the vent temperature The primary loop controls the air temperature in the incubator by telling the secondary loop how hot the vent air should be The secondary loop regulates the temperature of the vent air by controlling the power to a heater coil The a
181. ist 180 Too many macros The maximum number 10 of macros is already running including the startup macro macros received from all I O ports and macros started from the Program screen At least one macro must finish before any new macros can be started 185 Excessive recursion macro may call another macro which can call another macro and so on but only 6 levels of recursion are allowed This error is always generated if a macro calls itself 186 Assembled macro exceeds 1024 lines When a macro is assembled all of its subroutine calls are expanded into their component instructions thus the assembled macro only contains native instructions The assembled macro cannot be longer than 1024 lines CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 106 200 299 runtime errors Runtime errors are produced after the macro starts running After a runtime error occurs the macro continues to run 221 Locked parameter The parameter is locked on the front panel the control is greyed out and cannot be changed 222 Argument out of range The argument was a numeric value and was too large or too small 224 Bad argument The argument must be chosen from a list of possible values and the argument provided is not on the list 225 Out of memory At attempt was made to define a macro but ten macros are already defined in RAM Startup macros To make a macro run automatically whenever the CTC100 bo
182. istor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Divider Thin Film 10 0K x 2 0 1W 1 2ppm ratio SOT23 Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thin Film 1 50 ppm MELF Resistor Thick Film 1 8W 5 1206 Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Resistor Thick Film 5 200 ppm SMT Network DIP Isolated 1 16W 5 Tiny CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Parts List 151 RN273 RN291 RN292 RN510 RN512 RN530 RN532 U110 U120 u200 u210 U220 U221 U233 U234 U235 U240 U250 U260 U270 u271 U280 u290 U310 U320 U500 U540 U550 ZO Z1 Z2 4 00911 4 00912 4 00911 4 00909 4 00909 4 00909 4 00909 3 01696 3 01498 3 00656 3 02064 3 00773 3 01133 3 01821 3 01821 3 01821 3 00675 3 01257 3 01386 3 01257 3 01186 3 01258 3 01366 3 00814 3 01979 3 00663 3 00787 3 00743 0 00772 0 01318 0
183. lected sensor measurements are not converted to temperature and appear in the native units of the sensor i e millivolts for thermocouples volts for diode sensors and ohms for resistive sensors When Sensor units are selected the Units button is blank and System display units returns an empty string When the system temperature units are changed other variables that are expressed in temperature units need to be manually updated by the user These variables are not automatically updated because in some cases it is inappropriate to update them for example when inputs are set up to reflect temperature differences rather than absolute temperatures The following settings may need to be updated Channel PID Setpoint Channel PID Ramp Channel PID P Channel PID I Channel PID D Channel Alarm Min Channel Alarm Max Channel Cal Offset All Zone Min P I and D settings Bright System Display Bright Off 2 3 4 5 6 Max Sets the backlight brightness If set to Off the display turns completely off but turns on again for 2 seconds each time the screen is touched Extras System Display Extras Hide Show Displays extra channels for monitoring internal values such as the printed circuit board PCB temperature of the I O cards heater current heater voltage and heater resistance The PCB temperature channels will not appear until the system is rebooted X labels System Display XLabels Absolute Elapsed Absolute the la
184. line of text as a separate macro and the variable x has not been defined in the second macro The four basic arithmetic operations power bitwise and amp and bitwise or can be applied to variables X 2 x 8 dx 1 dx 2 6 x 7 x 2 dx amp 2 dx 2 Spaces are not allowed before the and operators The equals sign is optional and can be replaced with a space The CTC100 has three virtual channels that behave like much like variables However while a variable can only be used by the macro that defined it the value of a virtual channel can be accessed by any macro The value of a virtual channel also persists after the macro ends Also the value of a virtual channel is only updated when an ADC conversion occurs but the value of a variable is updated without any lag when an instruction changes its value Finally virtual channels can be plotted on screen and logged to USB while variables cannot except by assigning their value to a virtual channel Once defined a variable can be substituted for any numeric argument For example the macro y 5 Outl y sets the value of channel Out 1 to 5 When f variable is used as an argument a question mark can optionally be added after the variable name to indicate that the variable is being queried y 5 Outl y Variables can be used within conditional statements The macro x 0 while x lt 3 x 1 Outl
185. lls outside the limits of the calibration data or input circuitry Normally a blank reading means that no sensor is connected If a sensor is in fact connected but the reading is still blank try the following steps 1 Ensure that the sensor is correctly connected At a minimum the sensor must be connected to the I and I pins 2 Measure the resistance of the sensor with an ohmmeter to ensure that one of the wires is not broken 3 Bring up the channel setup screen for the input channel and check the following settings Sensor must agree with the type of sensor that is in use Range set to Auto or if a fixed range is selected make sure it s larger than the sensor resistance Current Forward Reverse or AC If the current is off no sensor reading will appear Cal Type must agree with the type of sensor that is in use Cal R0 for RTDs only must agree with the type of sensor that is in use 4 Go to the System Setup screen and change the Units to Sensor Now the reading will appear in ohms or volts instead of degrees Is the value correct 5 If you re using a custom calibration table make sure that the sensor resistance or voltage is within the range of the calibration table 6 If you re using a resistive sensor and the reading in ohms is incorrect remove the sensor and instead connect a resistor of about the same value to the CTC100 If the reading is still incorrect the unit may need to be returned to SRS for recalibrat
186. lock A 16 MHz clock signal used for the Atmel microcontrollers A15 RESET When pulled low the Atmel microcontrollers on all I O cards are reset regardless of whether or not CS is active Used to upload firmware onto the microcontrollers B4 B11 C4 C11 D 0 15 The data lines Only D0 D7 are currently used CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 129 ASRS C13 CS Card Select Each I O card has its own active low select line An address decoder on the backplane decodes a 4 bit address provided by the CPU and pulls the appropriate select line low Addresses 0 5 select the I O cards 6 selects the front panel 7 is not used and addresses 8 and above select none When low the I O card can send and receive messages from the CPU during which time the card stops all other activity C14 SRDY Slave Ready The I O card inverts the state of this line after reading data or placing data on the bus Each bus transaction starts with SRDY in a high state C15 MRDY Master Ready The CPU inverts the state of this line when it places data on the bus in write mode or after it has read data in read mode Each bus transaction starts with MRDY in a high state C16 R W Read Write If high the selected I O card takes control of the data lines If the CPU holds the R W line high when CS is pulled low the I O card immediately sends its most recent reading from each channel Otherwise the I O card w
187. low In Follow mode the value of an output channel follows the value of another channel with offset and gain applied Output Input Zero pt X Gain Note that Input can be either an input or an output channel Also note that when the input is equal to the zero point the output is zero Errors Issuing a zero point or gain instruction when the PID mode is set to On or Off produces an assembly time Unrecognized instruction error Channel PID Input Channel name Determines which temperature the PID feedback loop controls If the channel name does not exist any previously selected input is deselected leaving no PID input selected and the PID feedback disabled Channel PID Mode Off On Follow Enables or disables PID feedback Turning feedback off freezes the output at its current value but does not set the output to zero Setting the mode to On starts PID feedback using the current PID gains In Follow mode the output is continuously set to the value of the channel selected with the input instruction adjusted by the Zero pt and Gain factors The input must be stable before either Step or Relay tuning is started Furthermore the output must be greater than half the step height before relay tuning is started The best time to start a step response is when the system is first turned on at the beginning of the day i e the heater is cold and its temperature stable After the step response finishes the feedback m
188. mperature changes due to environmental factors such as ambient temperature variations Some of our customers have reported achieving 1 mK stability although it s often necessary to optimize the mechanical design of the system before this goal can be reached To ensure that the sample can be heated or cooled rapidly the heater must have adequate power it must be in good thermal contact with the sample and the entire system must be as small as possible If the system is an environmental chamber consider using a flow through configuration in which fresh air is continually introduced into the chamber and is heated or cooled before it enters the chamber This can be accomplished using a chassis mount fan with a built in heater This configuration can produce a much quicker response than heating the chamber itself The rate at which the system can be cooled should ideally equal the rate at which it can be heated Systems based on resistive heaters often cool very slowly if they re insulated to protect them from ambient temperature variations or if they operate close to the ambient temperature Because PID feedback uses the same algorithm for both heating and cooling the response time of the feedback will be limited by the cooling rate even while the system is heating up Performance can be dramatically improved either by adding a fan to help cool the system or by using a TEC device which can both heat and cool Ambient temperature variations must also
189. n be supplied as hexadecimal values with the prefix 0x the number zero list or help suffixes followed by a lower case letter x for example ASE 0x10 sets the Alarm Status Register to hex 10 decimal 16 Queries always return values in decimal format ASE O ASE Sets or gets the value of the Alarm Status Enable ASE register If a bit of the ASR is set and the same bit of the ASE is also set bit O of the Status Byte register is set ASR Returns the current value of the Alarm Status Register ASR and then clears the register The Alarm Status Register is a 32 bit integer that indicates which alarms were triggered since the last time the ASR command was issued Each of the CTC100 s input channels is assigned a bit in the Alarm Status Register When an alarm is tripped the channel s bit in the Alarm Status Register is set The bit is not cleared when the alarm turns off Use the channe1 alarm mask instruction to determine which bit a particular channel is associated with CLS Clear Status Sets all status registers to zero disabling all standard events DMC Macro name Macro content Define Macro Command Identical to the define instruction Defines a macro saving the text in the CTC100 s local memory Note that the macro content like all instruction arguments must be 256 or fewer characters in length EMC 0 1 EMC Enable Macro Commands Sending the command EMC 0 disables macro expan
190. n milliseconds since 1970 and the value of the point are reported otherwise only the value is reported The reset option resets the next argument for all channels the next time the instruction getLog channel next is issued for any channel the last point in that channel s log will be reported No arguments should be used with the reset option The v verbose option adds the name of the channel to the reply The name of the channel is also added if the System Com Verbose setting is High For example the macro getLog reset while 1 getLog In 1 next transmits the value of channel In 1 each time a new value is logged getLog channel returns the number of data points that can be read with get Log channel next before the end of the log is reached For example to read all logged data for channel 3A first issue the following instructions CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 84 getLog In 1 first getLog In 1 Then send the instruction getLog In 1 next the indicated number of times Errors if the channel does not exist a run time error occurs getOutput Returns a single comma separated string containing the current value of all channels The values are always reported in the same order which can be determined with the getOutput names instruction getOutput names Returns a single comma separated string containing the names of all channels getOutput units R
191. n the channel to the global log rate set Logging to Default Current Channel Current Forward Reverse AC Off Forward the polarity of the Sense and Excitation pins are as shown in the connector diagram Reverse the polarities of the pins are switched and the sense current flows in the opposite direction through the sensor Can be used to compensate for diodes that have been connected backwards AC the current switches polarity with every reading The measured resistance is the average of the last two readings Recommended for resistive temperature sensors such as RTDs and thermistors since it cancels out thermal EMFs significantly improves accuracy and reduces noise Off disables the excitation current The sensor cannot be read in this state and no sensor reading will appear Prevents the CTC100 from hunting for the correct range when no sensor is connected a process that generates audible clicks If two diodes are connected in parallel but with opposing polarities to a single pair of leads one diode can be read with the forward current setting the other with the reverse current setting and their average with the AC setting This technique reduces the number of leads and therefore the amount of heat transfer PCB Channel PCB 0 0 Sets the maximum printed circuit board PCB temperature Since channels In 1 and In 3 are located on a single printed circuit board their PCB setting is always the same Likewise channels
192. n the parent macro are also valid in and can be modified by the child macro For example define a macro called multiplyXY by sending the following text to the CTC100 define multiplyXY x y Subsequently multiplyXY can be called to modify the variables of a parent macro x 3 y 4 multiplyXY dx 12 0000 A subroutine macro must consist of one or more complete instructions with arguments Macro calls cannot be used to substitute text into arguments Like normal instructions macro names are not case sensitive However if a macro has the same name as a built in instruction the macro takes precedence if it is called with a capitalized first letter while the instruction takes precedence if it is called with a lower case first letter Errors If the child macro contains any invalid instructions an assembly time error occurs and neither macro runs A macro cannot be both defined and called by another macro either an assembly time not a valid instruction error will occur or an older version of the macro will be called instead of the new one CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 83 Remote instructions In the following listing words in Courier font represent text that may be sent to or received from the CTC100 over RS 232 USB GPIB or Telnet or via a text file on a USB memory device Words in italicized Courier are placeholders that should be replaced with other names or values for example wh
193. nd click the Activate button CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 76 Windows XP computers may introduce a 150 ms delay after receiving the first character of each message from the CTC100 limiting the speed of the Ethernet connection Windows Vista and Linux computers do not have this issue Troubleshooting communications problems If the remote interface does not respond at all try the following If using RS 232 make sure the baud rate is set correctly Make sure that each line of text sent to the CTC100 ends with a linefeed character decimal 10 hex 0x0a n Try viewing the System COM History window This will tell you if the CTC100 is receiving anything at all Try sending the command popup hello This command produces a response that is easy to see a popup window appears and only requires that the interface work in one direction Next send the command description which should generate a response Communication assembly and run time errors If the CTC100 is unable to receive a macro due to a problem with the I O port a communication error may be generated and the macro does not run If the macro is successfully received the CTC analyzes it and any macros that it calls to ensure that Fach instruction is valid and The arguments for each instruction are valid for example if the instruction takes an integer value the argument must be an integer if the instruc
194. ndicates that the format differs from this description 4 byte unsigned integer Bytes 8 11 Location of first record in bytes from the beginning of the file The file format allows additional information in ASCII format to be included in the space between the file header and the first record Currently though no additional information is included 4 byte unsigned integer Must be at least 12 and is normally 12 Record Bytes 0 3 number of data points in this record if 1 this is the last record and the number of data points is equal to the number of bytes following this record header divided by four 4 byte signed integer Bytes 4 11 the time that the first data point in the record was acquired expressed in milliseconds since January 1 1970 8 byte unsigned integer Bytes 12 19 number of milliseconds between data points 8 byte unsigned integer Bytes 20 23 checksum The sum of all data points in the record if the raw data values are read as if they were 4 byte integers instead of floating point values The checksum is not valid if the number of data points is 1 4 byte signed integer The data values begin immediately after the record header Bytes 24 27 data point 0 4 byte IEEE floating point value Bytes 28 31 data point 1 4 byte IEEE floating point value etc The size of a log file cannot exceed 2 GB or about 500 million data points At the default 1 second log rate this limit is reached in about 15 years
195. none High 2A Value 37 4722 Error xyz is not a valid instruction 2A Value 37 47 system display Bright Min 2 3 4 5 6 Max Sets the brightness of the front panel display backlight system display Figures 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Sets the number of figures that appear after the decimal point in the replies to remote queries of floating point values as well as on the Numeric tab of the Show Data screen Fewer figures appear after the decimal point if the value is greater than 1000 or less than 1000 system display Stats Off On Controls whether statistics are visible in the plot If set to On and the plot type is single or multiple the average and standard deviation for each channel for which statistics collection has been enabled with channel stats is shown next to the channel name Ponytail plots do not show the average and standard deviation but instead show the offset of each channel if stats display has been enabled system display T PCB Hide Show If set to Show the temperature of each I O card that has a printed circuit board PCB temperature sensor is collected stored and shown on the Select screen The system must be restarted before any changes are effective system display Type Single Multiple Custom Ponytail Controls the type of plot On a Single plot all selected channels appear on a single Y axis Multiple generates a separate plot for each selected channel Custom assig
196. notation i e 172 16 0 0 Errors If part of the specified IP address is not in the correct format i e contains a non numeric character or a value that is not between 0 and 255 that portion of the IP address is set to zero The IP address cannot be changed if system IP DHCP is set to on system IP DHCP On Off Enables or disables the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol If DHOP is enabled and a DHCP server is available on your network the IP address subnet and gateway are automatically set and cannot be changed manually system IP Gateway 0 0 0 0 Sets the address of the Ethernet gateway This value does not need to be set to carry out Telnet communications and is only included to support Internet features that may be added to future versions of the CTC100 firmware Errors The gateway cannot be changed if system IP DHCP is set to on system IP MAC 00 00 00 00 00 00 Sets or queries the media access control address This value is set at the factory and should not generally be changed unless the CTC100 s nonvolatile memory has been erased The address should be specified in six groups of two hexadecimal digits separated by colons i e 00 19 b3 06 00 00 The default MAC address is 00 19 b3 06 ab cd where abcd is the hexadecimal representation of the last four digits of the instrument s serial number system IP Subnet 0 0 0 0 Sets the subnet mask The subnet mask should be in dotted decimal notation i e 255 255
197. ns each selected channel to a plot based on the channel s Plot setting Ponytail produces a single plot with all selected channels but each channel s trace is offset by its initial value The offset is recalculated whenever the user scrolls or zooms the graph system display Units C K mK F Sets the system units Setting the units does not change previously acquired data that is if a value of 22 C is recorded in the log and the units are then changed to F graphs and logs will appear to show that a value of 22 F was recorded If the units are set to an empty string thermocouple readings are shown in millivolts and RTD and thermistor readings are shown in CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 93 ASRS ohms even if the sensors have a custom calibration curve with declared units see the Custom calibration section system display XLabels None Absolute Elapsed Controls the type of label shown at the bottom of the plot Absolute shows the time and date while Elapsed shows the relative time in seconds minutes hours or days system display XRange 0 Sets the X range of the plot in milliseconds Only the plot for the currently selected group is affected Errors a run time error occurs if the argument is less than 10000 10 seconds or greater than 2592000000 30 days system IP Address 0 0 0 0 Sets the CTC100 s IP address The IP address should be in dotted decimal
198. ntervals and it s often useful to resample the data so that data points appear at the same interval for all channels Resample period seconds If the Resample control is checked the Resample period field controls how many seconds each line of data in the output file represents If the Resample control is not checked the Resample period field has no effect Start Press the Start button to begin the conversion Close Press the Close button to save all settings and close PTCFileConverter Clicking the X button in the upper right corner of the window closes the program without saving any settings CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 118 FileGrapher FileGrapher is a Windows utility that plots CTC100 log files To plot a file either drag a log file onto the File Grapher icon or double click the FileGrapher icon and then select Open from the File menu Once the file has been plotted a file selection window appears that shows all of the CTC100 files in the same directory as the plotted file Click on a file in the file selection window to plot it Shift click or Control click to plot two or more files at the same time The first file listed in the selection window always appears as a black trace the second file is always red the third blue the fourth orange To zoom in on a graph draw a rectangle around the area that you d like to zoom in on To zoom out to the previous zoom area d
199. ntly not used The RS 232 port is provided for debugging and is not used The GPIB interface is based on a National Instruments TNT4882 GPIB chip Since the GPIB chip uses a 5V supply while the other CPU bus components use a 3 3V supply 5V tolerant transceivers are needed to interface the chip with the CPU bus A glue logic chip U160 resolves incompatibilities between the GPIB s data bus and the CPU bus Sensor input cards SRS Each of the two sensor input cards has two input channels The cards measure the resistance of thermistors and RTDs by passing an excitation current through both the sensor and a reference resistor in series with the sensor An ADC measures the ratio between the sensor and reference voltages Diode sensor voltages are measured with a similar technique except a 5V reference is used instead of the reference resistor Because each card has two independent channels it has two copies of each of the following analog circuits Part references are given for one circuit only Variable current source generates the excitation current A 10V reference U610 resistor ladder and 8 1 multiplexer U620 produce one of eight voltages 200 mV 300 mV 500 mV 1 V 2V 3V 5V or 10V Op amp U650A provides the excitation current keeping the voltage across a sense resistor equal to the selected voltage Multiplexers U630 and U670 select one of CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 131 th
200. o RAM USB None Set this parameter to USB to begin logging data to a USB memory device if one is present Set it to RAM to stop logging data to the USB device and store data in local memory and to None to disable logging altogether If set to None no data appears on the Plot screen Errors if USB is selected and no USB storage device is present this parameter automatically switches to RAM system log USB Auto Manual If set to Auto any time a memory device is plugged into one of the CTC100 s USB ports the CTC automatically begins logging to it If set to Manual the user must touch the USB logging triangle in the upper right corner of the screen to begin logging system other A D rate 20 ms 40 ms 60 ms 80 ms 100 ms 120 ms 140 ms 160 ms 180 ms 200 ms 220 ms 240 ms 260 ms 280 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms 900 ms 1000 ms 50 Hz line frequency system other A D rate 16 7 ms 33 3 ms 50 ms 66 7 ms 83 3 ms 100 ms 150 ms 200 ms 250 ms 350 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms 900 ms 1000 ms 60 Hzline frequency system other A D rate 0 0 1 MHz trigger source Sets the A D conversion time and determines how often PID feedback loops run Different arguments are available depending on whether the line frequency is 50 or 60 Hz If the Trigger source jumper on the CTC100 s motherboard is moved to the 1 MHz clock position the A D sampling can set to any value
201. oaded from the SRS website www thinksrs com Then in the New Hardware Found dialog click the Have Disk button and point the installer to the USB driver No additional setup is needed If the PC does not recognize the presence of the CTC100 when the USB connection is made unplug the USB cable and plug it back in In addition if the CTC100 is turned off and back on again while the PC application is running the application may no longer be able to communicate with the CTC100 until it is closed and re opened When using LabView to communicate with the CTC100 over USB ensure that the National Instruments VISA driver is version 4 0 or later Older versions of the driver cannot communicate with the CTC100 The latest version can be downloaded for free from the National Instruments website USB host port Macros can be imported from a USB hard drives or flash key Save the macro as a text file its name must end with txt and copy it to a folder named macros in the topmost directory of the USB device When the device is plugged into the CTC100 up to six buttons with the names of the text files appear in the System Macro menu A macro can then be run by touching the button with CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 75 ASRS its file name If the USB device is unplugged the corresponding macro buttons disappear but any running macros continue to run In addition one macro can be saved in th
202. oblem and indicates that the line frequency is not exactly 50 or 60 Hz or that the CTC100 s clock is running slightly slow or fast A value significantly different from 10096 may indicate a problem with the circuit that synchronizes the ADC conversions to the AC line frequency The first 3 digits are cleared each time TST is issued For example 13400 would indicate 13 read misses on slot 4 since the last time TST was issued and that the system clock is operating normally WAI Wait to Continue Pauses the parent macro until other macros received on the same port all PID tuning processes regardless of how they were started and all setpoint ramps have finished Identical to OPC but doesn t provide any explicit indication to the I O port when the wait is complete CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 89 Program menu ASRS The program prefix can be used but is not necessary for these instructions abortMacro Macro content Defines an abort macro The abort macro is run if the macro that defined it is aborted with an abort or kill instruction or is stopped from Program or Setup screens The abort macro is not run if the macro ends normally if a RST instruction is issued if a reset running macros instruction is issued or ifa reset a11 instruction is issued The abort macro also does not run if the macro is aborted before the abortMacro instruction is reached therefore this instruction sho
203. ode changes to manual and the heater ramps up to the setpoint Once the temperature is stabilized at the setpoint relay tuning can be used to produce more accurate PID parameters When relay tuning is complete the PID mode changes to manual Errors Attempting to set the PID mode when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 103 ASRS Channel PID Ramp 0 0 Ramp rate Determines the setpoint ramp rate in degrees per second If the ramp rate is nonzero whenever the feedback setpoint is changed the feedback will gradually ramp the temperature to the new setpoint If the ramp rate is set to zero setpoint ramping is disabled and the CTC changes the temperature at the fastest possible rate Errors Attempting to set the ramp rate when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked parameter error Channel PID RampT 0 0 Ramp temperature The ramp temperature is an internally generated setpoint for the PID feedback loop it is the temperature that the CTC100 is trying to maintain at the present moment If the feedback is not running the ramp temperature always equals the sensor temperature since the CTC100 has no control over the sensor temperature when the feedback is not running When the feedback is started the ramp temperature automatically increases or decreases at the ramp rate until it reaches the setpoint Thi
204. oftware When the instrument is first switched on a bootloader program copies the firmware from flash into SDRAM after which the flash is no longer used 512 kB of SRAM U204 with battery backup holds all user settings if the battery fails all user settings revert to their default value A jumper J201 can be installed to prevent the part of flash memory that contains the bootloader from being overwritten As long as the bootloader is present the flash can be reprogrammed through the serial port If the bootloader is erased the card must be reprogrammed at the factory The LCD controller U401 contains the CTC s video memory and generates drive waveforms for the LCD display Nearby are the Ethernet and USB host device controllers U440 and U600 Voltage supervisor U101 resets the ColdFire if the 3 3V supply voltage drops below 3 1V or if the reset button S101 is pressed The supervisor also provides battery power to the SRAM and prevents the SRAM chip select from going low when power to the rest of the card is shut off Other components on the CPU card include a real time clock which runs off of battery power when the CTC is switched off and transceivers that interface the ColdFire to the backplane bus The EEPROM battery monitor and RS 232 transceiver circuits are not populated if populated the RS 232 transceiver on the CPU card provides a Linux terminal for debugging purposes The RS 232 transceiver for user communications is on the
205. oling fan may switch on occasionally Press the Output Enable key to exit standby There is no remote command to exit standby mode waitForRamp Pauses the macro until all PID setpoint ramps are complete To wait for a particular channel s setpoint ramp to finish use a while loop for example while Outl PID setpoint Outl PID rampT pause 1 s waitForSample Pauses the macro until an ADC conversion occurs waitForTune Pauses the macro until all PID tuning processes are complete To wait for a particular channel s tuning process to finish use a while loop for example while Outl Tune Mode Off pause 1 s SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 92 System setup SRS system com RS 232 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200 250000 Sets the baud rate for the RS 232 interface The interface always has no parity 8 bits and 1 stop bit system com verbose Low Medium High Determines how the CTC100 replies when a remote instruction is processed Low the CTC100 only replies when a query is processed Medium messages are also produced whenever an error occurs High messages are also sent whenever an instruction sets a parameter and the messages include the names of parameters that are set or queried Response to instruction Verbose level 2A Xyz 2A 37 47 Low 37 4722 none none Medium 37 4722 Error xyz is not a valid instruction
206. ols how long the CTC100 waits for a response If either value is too small the CTC100 may after attempting to tune display a message saying that there was an insufficient response If the values are too large tuning will take longer than necessary and your heater will get excessively hot Start tuning To begin tuning go to the channel setup screen and set the tuning mode to Auto If the tuner finishes successfully a high pitched tone plays and the feedback mode automatically changes to manual turning the feedback loop on If the tuner was unsuccessful Output Enable was off the heater was unplugged the temperature sensor was unplugged the heater was out of range or the response was insufficient a low pitched tone plays and the feedback mode changes to off disabling feedback control When PID tuning is started a window with information about the autotuner s progress appears This window can be dismissed by touching the OK button or any menu key Dismissing the window does not cancel autotuning to cancel autotuning either 1 set the tuning Mode control to Off 2 touch the output channel s Off button or 3 disable all outputs by pressing the Output Enable key If the status window is dismissed it can be shown again by touching the Status button in the output s Channel menu Automatic tuner error messages One of the following messages appears in the Tuning Status window if tuning was unsuccess
207. one that was touched delete the instruction that was touched or replace the instruction that was touched The Program screen has six buttons Play symbol If a program is displayed but not running press this button to start the program If a program is running in the currently selected tab the button is highlighted and pressing it stops the program Pause symbol Press this button to temporarily pause the program running in the currently selected tab Press the button again to resume the program Clear Erases all text from the Input Messages and Progress windows Unless it has previously been saved the current program is lost This button cannot be pressed while a program is running in the current tab Load Touch this button and a list of programs stored in memory is displayed Programs can be stored in memory with the Program Save button by sending a define instruction to a remote interface or by attaching a USB device with text files contained in a Macros folder Select a program from the list and its component instructions are displayed in the Progress window replacing whatever was previously in the window CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 47 SRS The Program Load button can be used to edit a previously saved program load the program then edit it in the Progress window and finally re save the program with the Save button To call a previously saved program as a subroutine from a program that y
208. onnected to the CTC100 and used as a low cost temperature sensor In this case a custom calibration must be used If the voltage across the diode is measured at two known temperatures the calibration coefficients can be calculated as follows B T T Vi V2 A Ti Vi B 273 15 C 0 where V is the voltage expressed in volts at temperature T expressed in C and V is the voltage at temperature T The resulting calibration is a linear approximation For greater accuracy a custom calibration table should be used instead of the A B C coefficients see page 22 CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 64 SRS Offset Gain Channel Cal Offset 0 0 Channel Cal Gain 1 0 The offset gain filter modifies the value of an input channel as follows output input gain offset where input is the input to the offset gain filter and output is the output of the filter This filter can be used as a simple way to adjust sensor calibrations The offset gain filter is applied after the sensor calibration and after the follow filter but before the difference lowpass and derivative filters Setup screen for channels Out and Out 2 Out 1 7 PID Tune Range Mode P Mode 50V 2A Off 0 000 Off Units Input Step Y A In 1 0 000 2 500 A IO type Setpoint D Lag off Meas out 0 000 C 1 000e 6 30 s Low Imt Plot Ramp Zone Type 0 000 A 1 0 000 s 1 Auto Hilm
209. or Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C270 5 00299 iH Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C271 5 00798 2 2U C272 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C273 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C274 5 00654 01UF X 4 C275 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C276 5 00525 1u CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C277 5 00299 fU Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C281 5 00299 IU Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C290 5 00299 1U Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C311 5 00035 47U Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad C312 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C313 5 00525 1u CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C320 5 00525 iu CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C321 5 00035 47U Capacitor Electrolytic 25V 20 Rad C323 5 00525 1U CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C331 5 00525 1u CAP 1UF 25V CERAMIC Y5V 1206 80 20 C500 5 00299 1Uu Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C501 5 00601 0 1UF 16V X7R C510 5 00299 1Uu Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C511 5 00299 1Uu Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C530 5 00299 1Uu Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C540 5 00299 IU Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 C550 5 00299 IU Capacitor Mono 50V 10 X7R 1206 D111 3 00011 RED LED T1 Package 3mm diameter D211 3 00403 1N459A 1N459A 175V 0 5A LOW LEAKAGE DIODE D212 3 02066 12CWQ10FNPBF D214 3 00626 MUR1100E MUR1100E 1000V 1A ULTRA FAST DIODE D221 3 00896 BAV99 BA
210. ots up enclose the macro in the following statement define Startup macro where macro is the text of the macro to be run Send this line over a serial port or run it from a USB stick The macro doesn t run when the define statement is issued but subsequently it will run each time the CTC100 boots up Note that the macro must be less than 256 characters long and must not call any macros stored on USB devices For example the following remote command defines a startup macro that displays a message each time the CTC boots up define Startup popup Power has cycled If the Startup macro contains any errors the macro won t run and no error messages will appear Therefore it s a good idea to test startup macros by running them normally i e by sending the remote command Startup or using the Program screen to start the macro Similar functionality can be obtained by saving a macro as a file called autorun txt in the root directory not the macros directory of a USB device and keeping the device plugged in to the CTC100 This macro will automatically run each time the USB device is plugged into the CTC100 and each time the CTC100 is turned on with the USB device plugged in Autorun macros are not limited to 256 characters and can call other macros stored on the same USB device SRS CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 107 Sample macros This section presents several sample macros to illustrate the cap
211. otuning started The tuner is unable to run in this mode Autotuning was cancelled because the tuning mode was set to Off Indicates that the user turned off autotuning while it was running Tuning was cancelled because the input was disconnected No sensor signal was detected during the tuning process Ensure that a sensor is plugged in and that its reading is not blank If the reading is blank an incorrect sensor range sensor type or calibration may be selected Unable to tune feedback because the outputs are disabled Press the Output Enable button to enable outputs The outputs must be enabled before autotuning or else the CTC100 will not be able to provide any power to the heaters Unable to tune feedback because the heater is disconnected This message appears when the heater is connected to channels Out 1 or Out 2 and the measured heater resistance is less than 1 Q or greater than 10 kQ Unable to tune feedback due to a hardware fault in the heater output This message appears when the heater is connected to channels Out 1 or Out 2 and one of the following conditions occurs The current at the and terminals is not equal Current was detected when the heater was supposed to be off The measured current differs from the expected current The card s internal power supply is not at its specified voltage Make sure that the heater is not shorted to ground or to another power supply In some cases this error message ma
212. ou re composing don t use the Program Load button since it would erase the rest of the program Instead touch the Progress window and select the saved program from the list of commands The Program Load button cannot be pressed while a program is running in the current tab Save define macroName macroContent Saves the current program as shown in the Input window to memory You ll be asked to supply a name for the program Up to 15 programs can be saved If 15 programs are already saved the Save button will have no effect Saved programs can be run using the Load button or called as subroutines by touching a line in the Progress window and then touching the name of the program Saved programs can also be called by sending their name like any other instruction over one of the remote interfaces Delete delete macroName Touch this button to display a list of programs stored in memory Select a program from the list and it will be deleted from memory If the program is running deleting it does not affect the running program Sending programs over RS 232 USB GPIB or Ethernet Programs can be entered from any of the CTC100 s communications ports RS 232 USB Ethernet via Telnet or the optional GPIB port Each line of text sent to the CTC100 is run asa separate program the entire program must be on a single line If two or more lines are sent to the CTC100 in quick succession the programs may run concurrently the CTC100
213. ouble click on the graph Triple click on the graph to show all data When FileGrapher opens a file it reads the entire file into a buffer in RAM Very large files may not fit in the program s memory or may take a long time to load and display If this occurs use PTCFileConverter to downsample the file before opening it with FileGrapher File menu Open Opens a directory for plotting All log files in the directory are shown in the selection window and the selected file is plotted All unsaved changes to data in the old directory are lost Close Closes the selected directory All unsaved changes to data are lost and the selection window closes Save GIF Saves the graph as a GIF file Save data Saves a trace as a text file or a binary PTC file See the PTCFileConverter documentation for more information on data saving options Exit Quits the program Edit menu Items in the Edit menu may affect how data buffers are graphed but do not affect the contents of the buffers Plot options Opens a window that controls the appearance of the graph Click Apply to update the graph with the new settings OK to update the graph and close the window Cancel to undo all changes since the last time the graph was updated and close the window Automatically scale X if checked the graph is automatically scaled to show the full time span of the data X minimum if Automatically scale X is checked this box indicates the time
214. p is determining the best feedback gains The constants P J and D are different for every apparatus and must be determined experimentally As a general rule if the gains are too low the feedback won t respond enough to temperature variations if they are too high the feedback responds too much and overshoots the setpoint and both heater power and temperature may begin to oscillate The faster the temperature changes in response to the heater the larger the gains can be In this section we will use step response curves to illustrate some basic aspects of how the three feedback parameters P J and D affect feedback performance Proportional the figure below illustrates the effect of changing the proportional gain P The top graph shows the power being delivered to a heater by a PID feedback loop during four separate tests while the bottom graph shows the temperature of the heater during the same tests Each test is identical except for the value of P At 1 minute the setpoint is increased from 60 to 70 C When P 1 W C second curve from top the feedback loop exhibits a perfect response that is the temperature rapidly increases to 70 C with a slight overshoot that serves to minimize the settling time If P is increased to 2 W C the temperature responds more quickly but then overshoots the setpoint by an excessive amount causing the system to oscillate CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 3l SRS
215. p tool such as TE Connectivity 58433 3 should be used for this purpose The CTC100 should always be switched off and unplugged when connecting the heater outputs Each output has two voltage ranges 50 V and 20 V and three current ranges 2A 0 6A and 0 2A Each output also has an auto range setting that continuously adjusts the current and voltage ranges to the smallest values needed to reach the channel s Hi Lint setting The 0 6A and 0 2A current ranges offer lower noise levels than the 2A range and are intended to be used when more precise control is needed On the other hand the 20V range is only included for safety reasons and it has essentially the same performance as the 50V range The maximum power that each output can deliver depends on the resistance of the heater see the table below Output Heater resistance Maximum range R Q power W l0 0 10 25 4R 50V2A 25 100 225 2500 R 75 0 4R 50V0 6A 75 33 gt 75 2500 R lt 250 0 04R 50V0 2A 250 10 gt 250 2500 R Maximum output power as a function of output range and heater resistance The heater outputs are generated on two printed circuit boards PCBs If the temperature of a PCB exceeds 60 C the CTC100 automatically shuts off the corresponding output This is likely to occur if the heater resistance is under 100 if the ambient temperature outside the chassis is above 30 C and or if the system fan is turned off or not working The PCB temperatures can be
216. pling period can be set to any integer multiple of 1 us rather than being limited to an integer multiple of the line period but 60 Hz interference is inevitable Jumper J160 should not be moved while the CTC100 is turned on The pinout of the I O card connectors on the backplane bus is described below The pin numbers and some pin names are printed next to each I O card s backplane connector Power A31 A32 8V An analog supply used to generate 5V B31 B32 20V An analog supply used to generate t 15V C31 C32 20V An analog supply used to generate 15V A29 A30 B29 B30 C29 C30 AGND Ground for the analog supplies May be floating relative to digital ground A27 A28 3 3V Powers the ColdFire CPU and other components on the CPU card B27 B28 B12 B22 A3 A12 A14 A18 B3 C3 C19 DGND Ground for the 3 3V and t 5V supplies C27 C28 5V Powers the Atmel microcontrollers and all other digital components on the I O cards A25 A26 B25 B26 C25 C26 24V Connects directly to the CTC100 s 24V brick power supply Used for all high current outputs A23 A24 B23 B24 C23 C24 24VR Ground return for the 24V supply Al A2 B1 B2 C1 C2 24VGND Ground for 24V Parallel bus This proprietary 8 bit data bus is used for communication between the CPU card and I O cards A4 A11 ADD 0 7 The address lines ADDO ADD3 are used to select a specific card ADD4 ADD are not used A13 CLK C
217. ppears touch the temperature input channel In 1 This tells the CTC100 that we want heater Out 1 to control the temperature of sensor In 1 PID input channel In 1 In 3 Out 1 Out2 AIO1 DIO 24 53 C 0 0004 0 000 10 00 V In 2 In 4 AIO 2 2434 C 2538 C 10 00 V AIO 3 10 00 V AIO 4 10 00 V Next touch the Setpoint button and enter the desired temperature Touch OK once you ve entered the setpoint Since the feedback is still disabled the CTC100 won t actually apply any power to the heater yet j SRS CTCI100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 20 SRS Feedback setpoint Old value 0 0000 C OK Clear Cancel DAG Configure the feedback autotuner The feedback tuner works by changing the heater output and then measuring how much the temperature changes in response Before this can be done you need to determine how much the heater output should be changed by and indicate how long the CTC100 should wait for the temperature to change Make sure the Channel screen is showing and the tab for the heater output channel is selected In the Tune column look at the Step Y and Lag controls If the output is increased to the value shown in Step Y would you expect to see a noticeable rise in temperature within the time shown in Lag Would the amount of power shown in Step Y damage your system Change these values if necessary Touch D and set the derivative gain to 1
218. pply and ground The microcontroller can switch the current through this resistor on or off to keep the power supply voltage from oscillating at low output voltages and or currents Constant current heater driver the card has three independent current output heater driver circuits which output 1 333A 0 465A and 0 200A If the user has selected a 2A range all three circuits operate in parallel If a 0 6A range is selected the 1 333A circuit is disabled If a 0 2A range is selected only the 0 2A circuit is enabled The three circuits are identical except for the sense resistor The microcontroller enables each circuit by pulling one of the three lines 2000MA_ONOFF 200MA ONOFF or 20MA_ONOFF low A 16 bit DAC U240 sets the desired output current The DAC outputs a value between 0 V no output current and 4 0 V highest possible current for the selected range Considering the 2 0A circuit current from the 50V supply flows through sense resistor R251 then through FET Q251 which throttles back the current to the desired level then to the user s heater This high side configuration is safer than the more common low side current source but given the 55V range it requires a special high side sense IC U290A The output of this chip is a voltage proportional to the voltage across sense resistor R251 multiplied by 20 When the maximum current is flowing 2A in this case the output is 4 0 V While the current source is enabled op amp U250A dri
219. r sensors You select a sensor type and the CTC100 uses built in calibration data that describes a typical sensor of that type No experimental data is needed Calibration coefficients potentially more accurate You enter 3 4 coefficients for an equation that is specific to your sensor type the Callendar van Dusen equation for RTDs the Steinhart Hart equation for thermistors or a polynomial fit for diodes The coefficients are typically provided by the sensor manufacturer or can be derived from several measurements at known temperatures Calibration tables you enter a table containing about 100 200 sensor readings over the entire working temperature range This method can produce the most accurate results of all but also requires the most experimental data The CTC100 can directly read the calibration tables provided by some sensor manufacturers See the Custom calibration tables topic on page 22 for more information Offset gain the temperature values produced by any of the above calibrations can be multiplied by a constant and then added to a second constant SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 62 SRS Type eae DT 470 DT 670 Si410 Si430 Si440 S700 S800 S900 Custom if Sensor Diode Channel Cal Type RX 102A RX 103A RX 202A RO600 R400 R500 ifSensor ROX Channel Cal Type ITS 90 US Custom ifSensor RTD Channel Cal Type 100 6 300 6 1000 6 2252 6
220. rRamp define popup waitForSample delete print waitForTune getError redraw Select print An alphanumeric input screen appears where you can enter an argument for the program print instruction Type hello Argument 0 Old value Shift Del Clear Esc OK Touch the OK button The Program screen re appears and the instruction program print hello appears in the second line of the Progress window Progress program print hello Input program print hello Messages CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 50 Setup screen SRS Next enter the instruction program pause 1 s The pause instruction has two arguments that must be entered separately First a numeric input screen appears where you can type 1 Touch OK and a second menu appears where you can select the units s The completed instruction will pause the program for one second Next enter the instruction program print world followed by program pause 1 s Finally enter the instruction 3 This makes the program repeat everything between the square brackets three times Press the start button While the program is running the current instruction is highlighted and the number of repetitions remaining appears next to the right square bracket In addition while the program is running a tab labeled New program appears at the top of the screen By touching this tab you can ent
221. rammable Temperature Controller Operation 59 SRS Lopass Channel Lopass Off 1 s 3 s 10 s 30 s 100 s 300 s The lowpass option smoothes the input signal with a 6th order RC filter reducing noise but also slowing down the sensor response If for example the 10 s lowpass filter is selected noise spikes less than 10 seconds long are removed but it would also take the signal at least 10 seconds to respond to any sudden temperature changes The filter s time constant should ideally be just below the response time of your hardware That is the 10 second lowpass filter should only be used if you wouldn t expect to see temperature spikes shorter than 10 seconds anyway In that case the lowpass filter only eliminates noise and doesn t slow down the system The lowpass filter should usually be enabled on the temperature inputs of PID control loops This is especially true when using step response PID tuning or when derivative feedback is enabled i e when the derivative gain is nonzero since these algorithms calculate the change in temperature over time and therefore produce poor results if high frequency noise is present When a sensor is disconnected and then reconnected to a lowpass filtered channel the CTC allows one second for the reading to settle During this time no reading appears The output of the lowpass filter is then set equal to the next ADC reading so that you don t have to wait for the reading to gradually
222. range 30 kO range 100 kO range 300 kO range 2 5 MO range RMS noise at midrange 100 range 300 range 100 0 range 300 Q range 1 kQ range 3 kQ range 10 kO range 30 kO range 100 kO range 300 kO range 2 5 MO range 100W DC outputs Output Connector Range Output resolution Accuracy Noise rms 25 Q load DC 10 Hz Analog I O Inputs outputs Connector Range Resolution ADC noise Digital I O Digital I O Inputs outputs Connector 0 00010 C 0 00010 C 0 00020 C 0 00040 C 0 0010 C 0 0030 C 0 010 C 0 020 C 10 C 20 C 500 C 0 0001 Q 0 0001 Q 0 0002 Q 0 0003 Q 1 4 mK for Pt100 RTD at 25 C 0 0007 Q 0 002 Q 0 007 Q 0 008 Q 0 12 Q 0 20 10 0 Two unipolar DC current sources 6 screw terminals Accepts 12 22 AWG wire or 6 spade terminals up to 0 31 wide Max torque 9 in Ib 50 V 2A 50V 0 6A 50V 0 2A 20V 2A 20V 0 6A 20V 0 2A 16 bit 1 mA 2 A range 0 5 mA 0 6 A range 0 2 mA 0 2 A range 5 uA 2 A range 1 5 uA 0 6 A range 0 5 pA 0 2 A range 4 voltage I O channels independantly configurable as inputs or outputs 4 BNC jacks 10 V 24 bit input 16 bit output 30 uV RMS 100 pV p p at 10 samples s 8 optoisolated TTL lines configurable as either 8 inputs or 8 outputs One 25 pin D sub socket CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Specifications x Relays Outputs 4 independent SPDT relays Connector One 12 p
223. range of the input Rate s the alarm sounds whenever the channel s rate of change in degrees per second exceeds the alarm Min or Max The alarm also sounds whenever the input is disconnected or the sensor value exceeds the range of the input Latch Channel Alarm Latch Yes No If set to Yes the alarm once triggered stays on until it is turned off with the Status or Mode control If set to No the alarm turns itself off once the input is again within the alarm limits Mute Channel Alarm Mute On Off Temporarily silences the alarm sound without affecting the associated relays or output channels Once this button is touched the alarm stays muted until the alarm condition goes away or until the button is touched again Sound Channel Alarm Sound None 1 beep 2 beeps 3 beeps 4 beeps Controls which sound plays when the alarm goes off Output Channel Alarm Output Output name The alarm when triggered can shut off one of the CTC100 s output channels setting the output to zero and temporarily disabling that channel s feedback loop Once the alarm status returns to Off the output returns to its previous value and the feedback is re enabled This feature can be used to guard against runaway feedback loops or to otherwise protect equipment from damage due to excessive temperatures For example one or more backup temperature sensors can be programmed to shut off a PID output to prevent damage in case the prima
224. raph etc add or remove a graph from the graph selection window sets the current size and position of the FileGrapher window as the default store positive negative marks from the specified buffer for use with break and riseStats set the x and y size of the plot in pixels no change list names of all currently existing buffers show tick marks on all plotted buffers apply a Gaussian smoothing filter specify radius in data points subtract two buffers buffer bufferl buffer2 subtract constant buffer buffer constant subtract average buffer buffer ave buffer subtract initial buffer buffer buffer 0 undoes the last operation that modified the indicated buffer weighted average buffer buffer buffer2 weighting factor 1 weighting factor Sets the X axis label to dateTime date and time elapsedTime elapsed time or off none Label the Y axis of the graph with the indicated text CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 127 CPU board ASRS Circuit description Each of the six I O cards two sensor input two heater output analog I O and digital I O includes an Atmel ATmega microcontroller U110 The microcontroller has onboard flash and SRAM Its clock signal comes from an external 16 MHz oscillator located on the CTC100 s backplane The microcontroller controls the ADCs or DACs on each I O card Each I O card has a status LED that turns on
225. rature Controller Introduction 9 SRS The DIO lines can also be used to pass a single 8 bit value into or out of the CTC The CTC treats the DIO like any other channel for example its value can be plotted or used in a PID feedback loop Virtual channels The digital I O card has three virtual channels which by default are named V1 V2 and V3 With the help of a macro these channels can be used to perform simple real time calculations such as determining the average of several inputs or to plot or log variables such as the setpoint Virtual channels can also be used without macros For example if the IO type of a virtual channel is set to Input the channel can follow the value of another channel see the description of the Channel Follow button in the Operation section and in addition can be modified by applying a lowpass filter subtracting a difference channel taking its derivative with respect to time or applying offset and gain factors By doing these calculations on a virtual channel that has been configured to follow a sensor input instead of doing them directly on the sensor input channel the raw sensor input is preserved and can still be viewed Likewise if a virtual channel s IO type is set to Meas out the channel s value can be controlled by a PID feedback loop The feedback loop can be used for example to implement cascade control see the description of the Channel PID Casc button in the Operation
226. rature control will be Enable the lowpass filter The stability of the feedback loop can usually be dramatically improved by lowpass filtering the temperature reading To do this first select the channel to be filtered by pressing the Select Channels key then touching the relevant channel to highlight it Although it s not necessary you could also select the output channel at this point since you will need to set it up next If any other channels are highlighted touch them to de select them In this example we ve selected temperature sensor In 1 and heater Out 1 1 Group 1 Input 5 Output 35 AIO DIO In 1 In 3 Out 1 Out2 AlO1 DIO 24 53 C 0 000 amp 0 000W 10 00 V 0 In 2 In 4 AlO2 Relays 2434 C 25 29 C 10 00 0 AIO 3 V1 10 00 V AIO 4 10 00 V Now press the Setup key At the top of the screen are three blue tabs a System tab for configuring system wide parameters like the RS 232 baud rate and the display brightness and a tab for each of the channels you selected Touch the tab labeled In 1 j SRS CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 18 SRS 7 Alarm 3 Cal Name Plot Lopass Status Output Type In 1 2 3s Off 2252 Q Logging didt Mode Relay Default Off Off None Sensor Current Latch Min Thermistor Forward No 0 000 C Range PCB Max Auto 55 00 C 25 00 C Diff Lag Offset Os 0 000 C
227. rea to zoom out Touch this area to enable and reset automatic scaling Touch this area to zoom in OOL How to change the Y scale of the bottom graph Touch and drag to pan How to pan the bottom graph vertically CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 46 Program screen SRS gt lI Out2 PID setpoint 50 0000 pause 10 00 min Input Out2 PID setpoint 25 0000 Out2 PID setpoint 50 pause 10 pause 10 00 min Save Delete 4 tie s program is a set of one or more remote instructions in ASCII text format Programs can be sent over the RS 232 GPIB USB or Ethernet interface input from the program screen or transferred as text files on a USB memory device Regardless of how a program was input its progress can be monitored from the program screen Up to 10 programs from any one interface and up to 20 programs total can run at once The Program screen has an Input window which shows the program as it was received a Messages window which shows responses and error messages from the CTC100 and a Progress window which shows the individual instructions in the program one instruction per line If a program is not running you can compose or modify it by touching a line in the Progress window Touching a blank line brings up a list of possible commands Touching a line that already contains an instruction brings up a list of three options you can add a new instruction on the line above the
228. ree algorithms The proportional feedback algorithm determines the error i e the difference between the desired temperature the setpoint and the actual temperature T The output Y of the proportional feedback algorithm is just the error multiplied by a constant P E t setpoint T t Y t P E t CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 30 Manual tuning SRS As the actual temperature approaches the setpoint the proportional output Y decreases to zero at which point no power is supplied to the heater Normally however some power is required to keep the heater at the setpoint which is why the integral feedback algorithm is needed It multiplies the error by a constant 7 and adds the result to the previous integral output Y t 1 E t Yi t 1 As the temperature approaches the setpoint the rate of change of the integral output Y drops to zero Derivative feedback tries to predict what the temperature will be in the future by multiplying the rate of temperature change by a constant D Yalt D T t 1 T t If the temperature is increasing and D is positive derivative feedback reduces power to the heater if the temperature is decreasing derivative feedback increases power to the heater The output of the PID feedback loop i e the heater power is the sum of the three feedback algorithms Heater power Y t Yi t Ya t The key challenge to using a PID feedback loo
229. ree connections labeled NC normally closed COM common and NO normally open The relay is in its normal or deactivated state when the CTC is turned off when its outputs are not enabled or when the relay is set to 0 In this state the NC pin is connected to the COM pin and the NO pin is unconnected When the relay is set to 1 and the outputs are enabled the relay is activated the NO pin is connected to the COM pin and the NC pin is unconnected The relays appear on the CTC100 display as a single 4 bit integer value between 0 and 15 If no relays are activated the value is 0 Each relay if activated adds the following to the displayed value Relay Value A B 2 C 4 D 8 SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 8 Therefore if the relay channel reads 6 relays B and C are activated Conversely setting the relay channel to 6 activates relays B and C and deactivates the other relays To set an individual relay from a macro or serial port without affecting the states of other relays use a bitwise operator for example the remote command relays 4 activates relay C while the remote command relays amp 11 deactivates relay C See the Remote programming section of this manual for more information on remote commands The CTC100 also has eight isolated TTL I O lines on a 25 pin connector The pinout of this connector is compatible wi
230. ree sense resistors 1 kQ 100kO or 10MQ The voltage across the sense resistor is measured by a unity gain instrumentation amplifier U660 Fixed 10 uA current source generates a high accuracy excitation current for diode sensors Voltage reference U640 maintains a 5V potential across R642 thereby producing the 10 uA current Op amp U650B provides a virtual ground for the reference the virtual ground voltage is the same as the voltage at the bottom of R642 Zener diode D641 prevents this voltage from exceeding 5V which is the maximum value that can be read by the ADCs Reference resistors Mechanical relays are used to select one of four reference resistors Mechanical relays are needed because the input protection diodes of semiconductor switches would leak current and produce unacceptable errors When reading diode sensors the excitation current still passes through a reference resistor although the reference resistor voltage is not actually used In this case the lowest resistance reference is selected Select current source and forward reverse current Multiplexer U230 controls the direction of current flow through both the temperature sensor and the reference resistor The current bypass U210 is engaged while switching between different excitation current values and when the excitation current is set to off It keeps the excitation circuit from developing a large voltage which could be damaging to diode sensors when it is disconnect
231. relay instruction determines which if any of the four relays is triggered CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 101 ASRS Channel alarm sound None 1 beep 2 beeps 3 beeps 4 beeps Controls which sound plays when the alarm goes off Channel cal submenu All channel ca1 instructions are only available for input channels Channel cal A Channel cal B Channel cal C Channel cal RO 0 0 These instructions set custom calibration coefficients for RTD thermistor or diode inputs with a custom calibration type See the description of the A B C and RO buttons on page 62 for more information Errors If cal Type is not set to Custom attempting to set cal A cal B or cal C produces a run time locked parameter error Attempting to use any of these instructions on a channel that is not a sensor input produces an assembly time unrecognized instruction error Channel cal Gain 0 0 Channel cal Offset 0 0 These commands can be used to adjust a channel s calibration The offset and gain are applied after the sensor signal is converted to temperature These instructions provide an easy way to make adjustments to a sensor s calibration Errors Attempting to set the offset or gain on a channel that is not an input produces an assembly time unrecognized instruction error Channel cal Type IEC751 US Custom RTD sensor type Channel cal Type 100 300 1000 2252 3000 5000 6000 100005 1000
232. ry sensor fails Touching the output button brings up a list of output channels from this list select the channel to be shut off If a channel is already selected touching it again de selects the channel and no channel will be shut off when the alarm triggers SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 61 Relay Channel Alarm Relay None A B C D If a digital I O card is installed in slot 6 the alarm can switch one of its four relays on It s possible to assign more than one alarm to a given relay in which case the relay will turn on if any one of the alarms is triggered Min Channel Alarm Min 0 0 The lowest permissible value of the input The alarm is triggered if the input or the rate of change of the input becomes lower than this value Max Channel Alarm Max 0 0 The highest permissible value of the input The alarm is triggered if the input or the rate of change of the input exceeds this value Lag Channel Alarm Lag 0 0 Prevents noise or glitches from inadvertently triggering the alarm The alarm will not be triggered until the input has continuously exceeded the min or max setting for this number of seconds The lag applies when the alarm is being switched and when it is being switched off Setup screen for channels In In 4 Cal column The CTC100 offers four different ways to calibrate sensor readings Built in calibration tables the easiest but least accurate way to calibrate you
233. s V2 and or V3 as described for channel V1 and add these lines after the d 1 statement if V2 gt t d 2 if V3 gt t d 4 The macro can automatically run every time the CTC100 is turned on just send the command define Startup replacing the with the macro contents CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 113 SRS CTC 00 Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 115 ASRS PC applications SRS offers a package of PC applications for displaying CTC100 logfiles and converting them to ASCII The package can be downloaded free of charge from the SRS website at www thinksrs com click on Downloads gt Software Once unzipped the applications can be run by double clicking the exe icons or dragging CTC100 log files to the exe icons It is not necessary to run an installation program CTC 00 Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 116 PTCFileConverter SRS PTCFileConverter is a Windows utility that converts one or more binary CTC log files into a single text file that can be imported by other programs It can also downsample log files to make large files more manageable Double click the program icon to open the setup window which has six input fields and two buttons Once the fields have been filled in files can be converted by clicking the Start button Or click the Close button and then drag one or more files
234. s are usually the same as the button names For example the instruction to change the RS 232 baud rate is System COM RS 232 the corresponding button is found in the System tab of the Setup screen in the COM column and is named RS 232 Connecting to the CTCI00 RS 232 The CTC100 s RS 232 port is a 9 pin female D sub connector The connector is not present if the GPIB option is installed The CTC100 is a DCE device and should be connected to a PC with a straight through DB9 male to DB9 female RS 232 cable sometimes called a modem cable as opposed to a null modem cable Depending on the capacitance of the cable the maximum cable length is about 50 feet at 9600 baud and 4 feet at 115200 baud The pin assignments are CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller ASRS Remote Programming 74 SRS Description Not connected CTCI00 data out CTCI00 data in Not connected Signal ground Not connected RTS Request to Send CTC flow control in CTS Clear to Send CTC flow control out Not connected warnnurawn 2 The RS 232 outputs pins 2 and 8 are not active unless a voltage greater than 2 7 V or less than 2 7 V is present at the receive pin pin 3 The outputs are 5V instead of the more standard 10V and may therefore not work with some older computers However the CTC100 can still receive 10V signals The RS 232 interface does not echo characters back as they are received The RS 232
235. s feature allows you to bring your system up to its operating temperature at a controlled rate The actual temperature of your experimental system should ideally follow the ramp temperature perhaps lagging a few seconds behind depending on how quickly your system responds and how well the PID parameters have been tuned Once it reaches the setpoint the ramp temperature remains at the setpoint as long as the feedback is running If the setpoint is changed the ramp temperature automatically increases or decreases at the ramp rate until it reaches the setpoint If the feedback is disabled the ramp temperature immediately begins to track the sensor temperature To start a temperature ramp enable the feedback set the ramp rate and then change Channel PID Setpoint to the desired end point of the ramp In general the ramp temperature should not be directly set by the user except perhaps as a way to cancel a ramp for example Outl PID RampT Outl PID setpoint tells the CTC100 to stop gradually ramping the temperature and instead proceed as quickly as possible to the setpoint On the other hand Out1 PID setpoint Out1 PID RampT stops ramping by freezing the temperature at its current value The following line can be used to pause a macro until the ramp is complete while Outl PID RampT Outl PID setpoint pause 1 s Errors Attempting to set the ramp temperature when no PID input channel is selected produces a run time locked par
236. se the getOutput names instruction Errors If a macro changes a channel s name any attempts to address that channel again within the same macro will produce an unrecognized instruction error Channel O f Output channels only Turns the selected channel off The instruction cancels any active autotuning process turns PID feedback off and sets the channels output to zero or the channel s lower limit see the channel Low lmt instruction whichever is higher Errors attempting to use this instruction on an input channel results in a compile time unrecognized instruction error Channel PCB 0 0 Temperature input channels only Sets the maximum allowable temperature of the input circuit e g the printed circuit board or PCB If the temperature of the circuit exceeds this value and System Other Fan is Auto the CTC100 increases the fan speed to cool the air inside the chassis The PCB temperature is always expressed in C regardless of the System Display Units setting Channel Plot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Indicates which plot the channel should appear in when the Plot screen is showing and the Custom plot tab is selected Plot 1 is the topmost plot If no channels are assigned to a plot that plot does not appear CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 98 SRS Channel Points 0 Controls the maximum number of ADC readings used to calculate the average and standard deviation The value refers
237. section Unlike other outputs virtual outputs are not forced to zero when the CTC100 s outputs are disabled with the Output Enable button However virtual PID feedback loops do stop running when the CTC100 s outputs are disabled When the value of a virtual channel is changed by a macro or via the front panel the new value does not become effective until an ADC conversion occurs Therefore if a macro sets the value of a virtual channel and then immediately reads the value back the old value may be returned CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation II SRS CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 12 Quick start tutorial Turn the instrument on Before turning the power on connect any sensors and heaters to the CTC100 as described in the previous section Then plug the CTC100 in and turn it on with the power switch on the back of the instrument A logo should appear on screen immediately and remain for about 30 seconds while the system boots A second splash screen appears for an additional 15 seconds while the firmware is initialized If the CTC100 does not turn on a fuse may have blown The CTC100 has two internal fuses that can be accessed by unplugging the instrument and then removing its top cover The Select screen The CTC100 boots up with the Select screen showing This screen has a button for each physical input or output on the CTC s back panel arranged in roughly the same order
238. sed on the temperature Setpoints can be ramped at a fixed rate or with a user program set from an analog input Feedforward and cascade feedback are supported CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Introduction 2 General purpose analog I O digital I O relays and virtual channels The CTC100 has four general purpose 10V voltage I O channels read by a 24 bit ADC Custom calibration curves and or offset gain controls can be used to convert voltage readings to pressure temperature etc The CTC100 also has eight digital I O channels that can interact with user programs Four 5A relays can be used for process control Three virtual channels not connect to any physical input allow calculated values such as the difference between two channels or a value calculated by a user program to be displayed graphed and logged Graphical touchscreen display The CTC100 s color LCD display can show any combination of temperature measurements and heater outputs on graphs or numeric displays Up to eight channels can be plotted either on a single graph with a common Y axis or on separate graphs with independent Y axes Touchscreen operation makes the instrument versatile and easy to use Data logging to USB memory devices Up to 4096 readings per channel can be logged to the CTC100 s internal memory For longer term storage data can be logged to standard USB memory sticks or hard drives Readings can be logged at intervals as short
239. selection group the graph s range may also change Note that the graphs always show data recalled from the log If data is deleted from the log it no longer appears on the graph In addition if the log interval is sufficiently long the graphs may have a stairstep appearance Single System display type single Touch the Single tab to see the selected channels plotted on a single graph with a common Y axis Up to eight selected channels can be shown If more than eight channels are selected only the first eight are shown Multiple System display type multiple Touch the Multiple tab to see each selected channel plotted on its own graph Each graph has its own Y axis scale If more than eight channels are selected only the first eight are shown Multiple 50 132 50 130 50 128 24 740 am 8 45 am 6 15 Jun 26 15 Custom System display type custom Touch the Custom tab to view a plot in which each channel can be assigned to one of up to eight graphs To set the plot a particular channel appears in display the Setup menu for that channel and touch the Plot button CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 42 In the example below channel In 1 has been assigned to plot 1 while channels In 3 and 4 have both been assigned to plot 2 Custom Jun Ponytail System display type ponytail The Ponytail plot resembles the Single plot except each trace is offset by its initial value so that
240. sensor is also limited that is if your sensor can respond to temperature changes within 1 second and you select a 10 second lowpass filter the sensor will now take 10 seconds to respond to temperature changes Errors attempting to use the Channel Lopass instruction on an output channel results in a compile time unrecognized instruction error Channel LowLmt 0 0 Output channels only Channel HiLmt 0 0 Output channels only Constrains the minimum or maximum value of an output channel These instructions can be used to prevent the PID loop remote commands or the front panel controls from delivering excessive power to a heater The limits must be specified in the same units that the output is expressed in The limits must normally be set again when the output units are changed since the limits are not converted to the new units If the lower limit is greater than zero it does not apply when the CTC100 s outputs are disabled with the Output Enable key or the OutputEnable off instruction Errors attempting to use one of these instructions on an input channel results in a compile time OD unrecognized Instruction error Channel Name New channel name Changes the name of this channel Once the name of a channel has been changed the default channel name In 1 In 2 Out 1 etc can no longer be used and all remote commands must address the channel by its new name To determine the current names of the CTC100 s channels u
241. set 4 Difference subtracts the value of another channel 5 Lowpass filters out noise 6 Derivative takes the derivative of the signal with respect to time The order affects how the filters interact with each other For example f the settings of filters 1 4 are changed and the lowpass filter is enabled the effect of the new setting on the sensor reading is lowpass filtered Changing the gain may have unpredictable results if the difference filter is enabled and changing the offset has no effect if the derivative filter is enabled Custom calibration tables have no effect if the follow filter is enabled Custom calibration tables SRS A custom calibration table can be applied to any input or output channel except for virtual channels The custom calibration replaces the preloaded sensor calibration and is responsible for converting the raw sensor reading in ohms volts etc to a temperature To use a custom calibration create a text file containing the calibration information as described below The name of the file should be the name of the channel to be calibrated plus the extension txt Create a directory named cal within the top level directory of a USB storage device and copy the txt file into the directory Plug the storage device into the CTC100 and the CTC100 automatically loads the files It is recommended that the storage device be left plugged into the CTC100 whenever the custom calibration curv
242. sion but does not affect macros that are already running EMC queries whether macros are enabled and returns either O macros disabled or 1 macros enabled Since the state of EMC does not persist when the CTC100 is rebooted macros are always enabled when the CTC100 is turned on SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 86 SRS ESE O ESE Sets or gets the value of the Standard Event Status Enable ESE register If a bit in the ESR register is set and the corresponding bit in the ESE register is also set bit 5 of the Status Byte register is set ESR Returns the value of the Event Status Register ESR and then clears the register The eight bits of the Event Status Register are assigned as follows Bit Value Description 7 128 Power On set when the instrument is turned on 6 64 User Request set when the user touches the front panel or presses a menu key 5 32 Command Error set when an assembly error occurs in a GPIB macro 4 l6 Execution Error set when a runtime error occurs in a GPIB macro 3 8 Device Dependent Error always 0 2 4 Query Error always 0 2 Request Control not used always 0 0 Operation Complete set by the OPC command GMC Macro name Get Macro Command Prints out to the I O port that received the command the text of a macro IDN Returns an identification string with the following format Manufacturer Model number serial number
243. sors if the sensor is connected in series with a 2 kO resistor as shown below Note that the diagram shows the sensor connected to channel A but it can also be connected to channel B The diagram shows the back of the DB9 connector that is the side that you solder to The 2 kQ resistor must have a low temperature coefficient of resistance TCR Ordinary resistors have a TCR of about 100 ppm C which means that the sensor reading will increase by about 30 mK for each 1 C rise in the ambient temperature Thermal drift can be reduced substantially by using a 5 ppm C resistor available from SRS ask for part number 4 02502 457 For even better stability a 1 ppm C resistor such as the Riedon USR2G 2KX1 available from Digi Key can be used In any case to minimize noise and drift the resistor should be soldered directly to the pins on the DB plug and covered up with the backshell Because AD590 sensors are highly sensitive to electromagnetic interference the AD590 wires and package must be shielded with the shield connected to pin 3 of the DB9 connector Excitation current The excitation current is automatically determined by the CTC100 based on the type of sensor and the measurement range as shown in the table below Measurement RTD Thermistor Diode range excitation excitation excitation 10Q 3mA mA 300 3 mA 300 pA 1000 2mA 100 uA 300 0 mA 30 uA kQ 500 pA 10 pA 3 kQ 200 pA 3 pA I0 kQ 50 pA pA 30 kO 50 pA 300 nA 10
244. st response but much more overshoot Moderate produces intermediate results Auto uses the conservative setting with the step response tuner and the aggressive setting with the relay tuner The CTC100 reports an error code if it encounters an error in a macro and System COM Verbose is set to High The error code appears in the error message sent to the communications port that initiated the macro and is accompanied by an explanation of the error and which instruction caused the error For example if you send the word Hello to the CTC100 over the RS 232 port when System COM Verbose is set to High the CTC100 replies with the following message Error hello is not a valid instruction assembly error 113 00 199 assembly errors Assembly errors are produced before the macro starts to run If an assembly error is reported the macro was cancelled before it began running 102 Empty instruction The instruction consisted of two quotes or parentheses in a row with no text in between 113 Invalid instruction The instruction was not recognized 109 Multiple argument error Two or more arguments were expected and the arguments provided did not conform to the types of arguments expected 121 Numeric argument error A numeric value was expected but a non numeric argument or no argument was provided 158 List argument error The argument must be chosen from a list of possible values but the argument provided is not on the l
245. strument 8 inches behind the front panel The CTC100 only has one battery 4 Remove the battery by pulling the coin cell toward you and sliding it to the left It can be somewhat difficult to remove 5 Install a new battery with the side facing toward the rear of the instrument 6 Replace the CTC100 s lid 7 After turning the CTC100 back on reset the instrument s time and date and any other user settings 4 A new battery should last for 6 years SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 73 Remote programming The CTC100 can be remotely controlled over RS 232 USB Ethernet and the optional GPIB port All of these ports are always enabled and accept the same commands In addition the front panel controls are always enabled To control the CTC100 remotely you transmit lines of ASCII text to one of its ports No action is taken until one of the following end of line characters is received alinefeed decimal 10 hex A n or e a carriage return decimal 13 hex D r followed by a linefeed decimal 10 hex A n The CTC100 s replies always end with a carriage return followed by a linefeed Each line of text sent to the CTC100 is treated as a macro meaning that it can contain one or more instructions as well as conditional statements and repeated blocks The macro starts running immediately and if it takes long enough to complete its progress can be monitored on th
246. t Logging RampT Ffwd 2 048 A Default 24 53 C Status Name Channel Name NewName Touch this button to change the name of the channel The name must have 10 or fewer characters Value Channel Value 0 0 This button can be used to manually set the heater output If the outputs have not enabled by pressing the Output Enable key the channel value button is greyed out and its value can t be changed If the outputs are enabled but the channel s PID feedback is turned on changing the heater output will have no effect Off Channel Off Pressing this button immediately sets the PID feedback mode to Off cancels PID tuning and sets the channel s output to zero or the Low Imt value whichever is higher Unlike the Output Enable key which turns all of the CTC100 s outputs off the Off button only affects one channel Low Imt Channel LowLmt 0 0 Touch this button to place a lower limit on the output If the minimum is greater than zero the output is still set to zero whenever outputs are disabled with the Output Enable key Limits are CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 65 always expressed in the same units as the value If the output units are changed the limits are not automatically converted to the new units and must be updated by the user Hi Imt Channel HiLmt 0 0 Touch this button to set an upper limit on the output for example to prevent the PID feedback loop from delivering excessive po
247. t and the PID input channel is not In 2 set the PID input channel to In 2 if x 2 amp amp Outl PID input In 2 Outl PID input In 2 pause 0 25 s 4 Within an if or while statement the prefix prevents the following text from being treated as a query If the prefix were left out the statement would attempt to compare the name of the PID input channel to the value of channel In 1 rather than to the string In 1 Drive a solid state relay with the digital IO lines In some high power applications the current to a heating or cooling unit is provided by an external power supply and modulated with an external solid state relay SSR To modulate the heater or cooler power and obtain accurate temperature control a variable duty cycle square wave similar to pulse width modulation but typically with a cycle time of several seconds is required from the CTC100 For example to supply half of the maximum power to the heater the CTC100 would need to turn the relay on for 5 seconds off for 5 seconds on for 5 seconds etc The following procedure transforms the output of a PID feedback loop into a variable duty cycle square wave that can be output on the CTC100 s digital IO lines and used to drive a solid state relay The macro works well as long as a period of about 10 seconds or longer and a resolution of 0 1 seconds is acceptable If a much shorter period or greater resolution is needed it would be better to fabricate
248. t cable 2 Enter a suitable IP address into the CTC100 s System menu If you re using a direct connection nothing else is connected to the network the IP address should be within your computer s subnet try using your computer s IP address but change the last digit 3 Enter a Subnet mask If you re using a direct connection this should be the same as the subnet mask on your computer 4 Open a DOS window on your computer If necessary install the Windows telnet client by typing pkgmgr iu TelnetClient In the DOS window type telnet 0 0 0 0 but replace 0 0 0 0 with the Ethernet address you just entered 5 Type popup hello and press Enter note that the first time you type a command the characters aren t echoed back You should see a popup window on the CTC100 s screen 6 Type Description and press Enter The CTC100 should return an instrument description string Various serial port redirectors are available that convert a telnet connection into a COM port allowing any software that can communicate over RS 232 to communicate with the CTC100 over Ethernet We have successfully tested the following on Windows XP Serial Port Redirector FabulaTech www fabulatech com Set the Protocol to Raw Data and flow control to None disable all other options TCP Com TAL Technologies www taltech com select Create Virtual COM port make sure flow control is set to None select the Connector COM1 COMO etc a
249. t is possible to display and log the I O card temperatures by setting the System Display T PCB control to Show It s necessary to restart the CTC100 for any changes to this control to become effective The fan speed can be overridden with the System Other Fan remote command This should only be done if it is certain that the heater output cards will not overheat otherwise the CTC100 may be damaged Besides the main system fan the CTC100 also has an internal fan that periodically turns on to keep the main power supply cool This fan runs even when the CTC100 is in system standby mode Rack mounting the CTCI00 SRS A 19 inch rack mount tray SRS part number O100CTRM is available for the CTC100 The tray will accept either one or two CTC100s or other half rack instruments Note that although the CTC100 chassis is 3U high the rack mount tray is 4U high Important the CTC100 s main vent is on the bottom of the chassis When rack mounting the instrument it is important to ensure that the vent is not blocked CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 29 Using PID feedback How stable is the CTCI00 s feedback control Basic concepts SRS The stability of the CTC100 s feedback is usually limited not by the CTC100 itself but by all the things outside the CTc100 the sample that s being heated the heater and the environment The key factor is how rapidly the sample can be heated or cooled relative to how rapidly the te
250. t to 45 seconds These values might be appropriate if the CTC100 is heating a small object weighing about 100g The CTC100 locks the heater output at its current value for one third of the Lag time in this case 15 seconds and measures how much the temperature changes over this period The CTC100 then increases the heater output by 2 W and waits for an additional 45 seconds to pass If the temperature does not change by at least ten times the amount that it changed during the first 15 seconds autotuning is automatically cancelled the CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 21 SRS heater output is returned to its original value and no changes are made to the feedback gains In addition if the Status window is showing it displays a message that says Tuning was cancelled because the response was less than 10 times the noise and drift The cause of the problem may be one or more of the following Raising the heater output by 2 W didn t significantly increase the temperature in which case Step Y should be increased 45 seconds wasn t long enough for the heater to respond in which case the Lag should be increased or The temperature was drifting up or down as the test began in which case the heater should be left to stabilize at room temperature for at least 30 60 minutes more if object you are heating is very large before trying to tune again It s OK to dismiss the status window or otherwise use the CTC100
251. ta points from each channel are stored in internal RAM At the default logging rate of 1 point per second this corresponds to a little over one hour of data Older data points are deleted The entire log is erased if the instrument is turned off or the logging rate is changed To create a permanent record of data or to plot more than an hour of data the CT C100 can store data on removable USB memory devices such as USB hard drives or flash memory keys The back panel of the CTC has two plugs for such devices the CTC logs data to the last USB device to be plugged in When a USB device is plugged in it takes the CTC100 several seconds normally about 5 seconds but sometimes up to 30 if the device contains a lot of files to recognize the device and for the USB logging feature to become available The USB memory device must be freshly formatted and must not contain any files other than CTC100 calibration log and macro files A small white triangle appears in the upper right corner of the screen whenever data is being logged to USB If a USB device is present but data is not being stored on it the triangle is dark blue while if no USB device is present the triangle disappears completely To log data to a USB device plug the device into the CTC touch the greyed out triangle and wait a few seconds until it turns white Touch the white triangle to stop logging Data is still stored in RAM while logging to USB Therefore if the USB device is unplug
252. tab to configure parameters that affect the entire instrument like the RS 232 baud rate the display brightness and CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 5 SRS the time and date The Setup screen also has one tab for each selected channel Touch one of these tabs to set up a particular channel Repeatedly pressing the Setup button or touching the group indicator in the top left corner cycles through the four selection groups Setup screen System tab 1 System r Macro Log Com IP Display Other Interval RS 232 DHCP Units Volume 01s 230400 Off C Max Verbose Address Bright Time e Clear Medium 0 0 0 0 Max 8 23 am Folder Subnet Extras BEIG 9 History Story 0 0 0 0 Hide Jun 26 15 USB means Gateway labels Abou Manual 0 0 0 0 Absolute bout Telnet Figures Reset 23 3 The System setup screen includes controls for all settings that affect the entire instrument including time and date Ethernet and GPIB and data logging parameters Setup screen System tab Macro column MacroName If any macros have been defined buttons with their names appear in the left hand column of the System setup screen If more than five macros have been defined buttons for only the first five appear Touching one of these macro buttons runs the corresponding macro and the button remains selected i e highlighted as long as the macro continues to run More generally
253. tely starts to track the sensor temperature The Ramp T button can be used to monitor the progress of temperature ramps Although the sensor temperature could also be used for this purpose it s subject to noise external disturbances and other artifacts that in some cases could make it difficult to determine the intended temperature P l D Channel PID P 0 0 Channel PID I 0 0 Channel PID D 0 0 Sets the proportional integral and derivative gain factors for PID feedback The PID equation is Output Pe O 5IT eo ei ei t e ec F ea ea e D T e e1 where P I and D are the derivative gains e is the error the difference between the setpoint and the PID input signal at time t and T is the ADC sampling time Thus larger values of P I or D produce a faster feedback response Negative values of P I and D should be used if the output drives a fan or other device that cools the sample Zone Channel PID Zone 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Auto The Zone setting stores up to eight sets of feedback parameters Each set can be associated with a temperature range and automatically recalled when the temperature of your experimental system enters that range The zone can also be manually selected ignoring the temperature To view a table of all stored feedback parameters touch the Zone button and then select Edit The table that appears has a row for each zone and columns for the zone s minimum temp
254. temperature changes in response and then estimates the optimum values of the gain factors P I and D Two tuning algorithms are available on the CTC100 the relay tuner and the step response tuner Relay tuner Multiple 40 0 49 5 49 0 1 min 2 min 4min Temperature top and heater power bottom during relay autotuning Step Y is 2 W Lag is 30 s feedback is initially on and the system starts with the temperature stabilized at the 50 setpoint After the tuning has finished the feedback turns on and re stabilizes the system at 50 C after a few cycles of oscillation The relay tuner creates a temperature oscillation by switching the heater between two output values Outputhnig Output Step Y 2 Outpu tiow Output Step Y 2 where Output is the initial output and Step Y is the value specified in the Step Y control Note that the relay tuner cannot be started unless the output is greater than Step Y 2 For best results the output should be greater than Step Y The relay tuner begins by disabling the feedback if the feedback was on and measuring the drift and noise of the feedback input signal in the absence of any changes to the feedback output The drift and noise measurement continues for one third the amount of time specified with the Lag control the resulting drift and noise value is the difference between the largest and smallest input signal observed during this time After the drift and noise me
255. th the standard PC parallel port The TTL lines can be used as inputs or outputs but all eight must have the same direction The pinout follows the pin numbers are embossed next to the pins on the D sub connector Unconnected 14 Unconnected 2 DO 15 Unconnected 3 DI 16 Unconnected 4 D2 17 Unconnected 5 D3 18 Unconnected 6 D4 19 Gnd 7 DS 20 Gnd 8 D6 2 Gnd 9 D7 22 Gnd 10 5V 23 Gnd I 5V I2 Gnd 24 Gnd n 25 Gnd 13 Unconnected All 25 pins on this connector are electrically isolated from the rest of the CTC100 and are floating with respect to earth ground Therefore to use the digital I O lines at least one of the Gnd pins must be connected to ground Alternatively if the digital I O lines are configured as inputs the value of DO to D7 can be set by shorting them either to a 5V pin or to a Gnd pin The status of the eight digital I O lines is reported as a single eight bit integer value Each I O line is assigned an integer value as shown in the following table Bit Value DO DI 2 D2 4 D3 8 D4 16 D5 32 D6 64 D7 128 The DIO value is the sum of the values of all set bits For example if only bits D1 and D3 are set the CTC100 shows a DIO value of 2 8 10 By using background macros the digital I O lines can be associated with most functions of the CTC100 The remote interface provides bitwise operators to set and query the relays and digital I O lines SRS CTC100 Programmable Tempe
256. the CPU Conditional statements must be followed by curly brackets otherwise the statement has no effect There is no else if statement Parentheses cannot be used within a conditional statement to affect the order in which parts of the statement are evaluated When the name of a channel is used within a conditional term it is sometimes unclear whether it should be treated as a query of the channel s value or as a character string In these cases the channel name or any other conditional term can be preceded by a dollar sign to ensure that it is treated as a string or by a pound sign to ensure that it is treated as a query For example if Outl PID Input In1 Outl PID Input In2 In this example the dollar sign ensures that the PID input channel is compared with the string In1 not the numeric value of channel In1 Dollar signs can only be used in this way within if or while conditions Conversely a channel name or any other conditional term can be preceded with a hash to force the CTC100 to treat it as a query Since conditional terms are treated as queries by default the pound sign is only required if you ve changed a channel name to a numeric value that don t contain any letters For example if you ve renamed one of the I O channels 2 this statement while 2 lt 50 pause 1 s pauses the macro until the value of channel 2 not the number 2 is greater than or equal to 50 variable 0 0 T
257. the sensor type is RTD the channel cal type instruction offers a list of RTD types and settings for the RTD s Callender van Duzen coefficients appear in the channel cal submenu CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 99 Channel Stats on off Using the remote interface the average and standard deviation of the most recent n ADC readings can be continuously calculated where n is defined using the channe1 Points instruction The values can be displayed on the graph screen using the System Display Stats instruction or queried with the channe1 Average and channel SD instructions Channel Stats turns sliding window statistics collection on or off for a channel When statistics collection is turned on the average and standard deviation over the most recent n ADC readings are calculated at each ADC conversion and can be displayed on the single or multiple plot screens or queried via the Average and SD instructions n is the smaller of 1 the number of ADC readings acquired since statistics collection was enabled 2 the number defined with the channel Points instruction or 3 the number of ADC readings acquired since the Points instruction was last issued This command is only available through the remote interface Channel Units W A V Heater output channels only By default the outputs of the heater driver cards are measured in watts Using the Units instruction the output units of the output card can be ch
258. tion has a list of acceptable values the argument must be one of those values Numeric values are not tested at this time to see if they fall within acceptable limits since those limits may change as the macro runs If the macro fails one of these tests it doesn t run and an assembly error is reported If the System COM Verbose setting is Medium or High the CTC100 reports the error by sending an I O port message that begins with the word Error If the Verbose setting is Low a message is placed on the error queue and can be retrieved with the geterror instruction At this point the macro is displayed on the Program screen and starts to run As each instruction is executed errors can occur if The instruction tries to change a value that can t be changed for example it tries to set the value of an input channel The instruction existed at assembly time but not at run time for example the name of a channel was changed after assembly and the instruction uses the old channel name The instruction tries to set a parameter to a value outside the allowed limits If a run time error occurs the instruction in question is not executed but the macro continues to run If Verbose is set to Medium or High an error message is sent to the I O port if Verbose is set to Low a message is placed on the error queue Concurrent macros Because macros can run for a long period of time or even indefinitely when the CTC100 receives a m
259. to 32 characters pause 0 0 ms s min hr Pauses the program for the indicated amount of time For example print hello pause 2 s print world prints the word hello on the program screen and also transmits hello to the serial port that the command was received from After two seconds the macro prints and sends world The pause instruction only affects the macro that it s a part of All other macros continue to run normally There is no pause query popup Popup text popup close Produces a popup window on the CTC100 s screen with the supplied message The message can be any alphanumeric string up to 128 characters long If a help window or another popup message is already showing it is closed and replaced with the new popup The user has to press a menu button or the popup window s ok button to dismiss the window Popup close closes any popup or help window currently visible regardless of how the window was created If a popup window is visible on screen popup returns the content of the popup window otherwise it returns the following text CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 91 No popup window is present portholdoff on off Prevents the IO port that received the parent macro from receiving any more macros until the parent macro has finished running or until a portholdoff off instruction is encountered print message Prints the indicated message The messag
260. to the number of ADC readings not the number of log points Each time the number of points is changed the accumulated statistics are cleared Errors if the number of points is not between 2 and 6000 inclusive a run time parameter out of bounds error occurs Channel Polarity 0 1 Digital I O card relay channel only Sets the polarity of the relays If both the polarity and the relay value are zero the normally closed NC pins on the back panel are connected to the neighboring COM pins and the normally open NO pins are disconnected If the polarity is 1 the reverse is true Channel Range 106 306 1006 3006 1k 3k 10k 30k 100k 300k 2 5V Auto Temperature input channels only Sets the sensor measurement range The default range is Auto In general a lower range results ina larger excitation current less noise and more accurate measurements The CTC100 uses ASCII character 234 for the Ohms symbol To type this character on a Windows computer hold down the alt key and type 0234 on the number pad On Windows computers the character appears as a letter e with a circumflex accent Errors If this command is used with a channel that is not a sensor input channel a not a valid instruction error is produced Channel SD If statistics collection is enabled for this channel with channel Stats this instruction returns the standard deviation over the most recent points A D samples Channel Selected
261. ttings to their factory defaults Channels Resets the settings on the Channel menu for all channels to their factory defaults Also sets the A D rate to 100 ms Log Resets the default log rate to 1 second sets the log rate for each channel to the default and enables automatic logging to USB If a USB storage device is attached erases log files in the root directory and begins logging to USB All resets all of the above items Setup screen for channels In In 4 7 Alarm Cal Name Plot Lopass Status Output Type In 1 2 3s Off 2252 Q Logging dat Mode Relay Default Off Off None Sensor Current Latch Min Thermistor Forward No 0 000 C Range PCB Max Auto 55 00 C 25 00 C Diff Lag Offset Os 0 000 C CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 57 SRS Except for the PCB setting all the settings on this screen apply only to the channel in the highlighted tab and will not affect any other channels When using the remote commands the word Channel where it appears in italics should be replaced with the channel name with spaces omitted For example the remote command to change the name of channel In 1 to Sample A would be Inl name Sample A Name Channel Name New channel name Touch this button to change the name of the channel The name must have 10 or fewer characters Value Channel Value Channel This button shows the most recent sensor reading The
262. uld usually be at the beginning of the macro The abortMacro instruction only affects the macro that called it and has no effect on any other macros clearerrors Erases all error messages for the port over which the instruction was transmitted Also clears all messages from the System Com Errors window regardless of which port generated them cls Clears the messages window on the program screen if the program is selected on the program screen s tab bar There is no cls query define Macro name Macro content Saves a macro The first argument is a file name under which to save the macro the second argument is the content of the macro Once a macro is saved it can be called from another macro by issuing the file name like any standard instruction The saved macro can also be started from the Program screen via the Load button or by touching the Progress window If a macro is already saved under the indicated name the old macro is overwritten If a file name conflicts with the name of a built in instruction the macro takes precedence if the command is issued with a capitalized first letter the built in instruction takes precedence if the command is issued with a lower case first letter A single macro cannot both define a macro and call it Calls to submacros are replaced with the full text of the submacro before the macro starts to run but the define instruction doesn t actually define the macro until run time Example
263. units are declared The measured value must be expressed in the native units of the channel ohms for resistive sensors volts for diode sensors and analog I O channels For heater driver channels the native CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 24 Virtual channels SRS units are by default watts but can be changed to percent volts or amps with the Units control in the Channel menu If in doubt have the CTC100 display its readings in native units by touching the System Display Units button and then selecting Sensor The calibration table must be expressed in the units in which the reading now appears A calibration table must contain at least two calibration points and the entire file cannot contain more than 4095 characters about 100 200 calibration points Commas should not be used within numeric values The CTC100 uses a cubic spline algorithm to interpolate between the calibration points except between the first and last two calibration points where a less accurate linear interpolation algorithm is used The data points do not have to be equally spaced they can be closely spaced in critical temperature areas and more widely spaced in outlying areas For RTDs the interval between data points should be 10 C or less to ensure the best possible 0 1 mK interpolation accuracy For thermistors an interval of 1 C or less should be used The numeric values may be separated from each other with one
264. used to regulate the CTC100 s fan speed The sensor is read by a built in ADC on the microprocessor Heater driver cards ASRS Each heater driver card outputs 2 A of current with a compliance voltage of up to 55V 24V to 50V 2A boost regulator this switching regular boosts the power supply voltage to the level required by the constant current heater driver Although the output of the regulator is labeled 50V on the schematics in fact it can be adjusted to any value between 28 and 55V or it can be disabled in which case the heater drivers receive a 23 8V supply The card s microcontroller sets the regulator output via a PWM signal such that it is always slightly above the heater voltage Switching regulator U210 regulates the supply such that the voltage at its feedback pin FB pin 3 is equal to 1 26 V The feedback pin voltage is produced by a voltage divider between the power supply output and op amp U220A When op amp U220A outputs OV the voltage across the heater OUT is 55V when U220A outputs 0 8V OUT is 24V Diode D221 protects the feedback pin from an over voltage condition during start up R214 sinks current when the op amp output is near its lower rail CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 132 Analog I O card SRS If SOVSHDN is low regulator U210 is shut down and the heater voltage is limited to 23 8V A 10W 120 ohm internal load resistor R331 is connected between the 50V su
265. utl PID ramp 1 Outl PID setpoint 100 while Inl lt 99 5 Inl gt 100 5 pause 1 s pause 1 min Outl PID setpoint 80 while Inl gt 80 pause 1 s pause 1 min Outl PID ramp 0 Outl PID setpoint 0 The pause 1 s instructions aren t strictly necessary but reduce the load on the CPU Control a feedback setpoint with an analog input Using the following macro it s possible to control the setpoint of channel Out 1 with the voltage at analog input A The macro converts the 10V analog voltage to a temperature between 0 and 100 degrees another way to scale the analog voltage would be to use channel 5A s offset and gain controls The contents of the macro are placed in an infinite repeat block square brackets followed by a negative number The waitforSample ensures that the block doesn t run any more often than necessary i e once per ADC sample waitforSample if Outl PID Mode on dx AIOA x 10 x 5 note spaces are not allowed before the Outl PID setpoint 4x 1 The setpoint is only updated when the feedback is turned on Although not necessary this precaution keeps the macro from generating run time errors when the setpoint is locked Show channels with tripped alarms on the Numeric screen This macro turns selection group 1 into a display of channels with tripped alarms Once per second if group 1 is selected all channels whose alarm mode is on are selected all
266. value cannot be changed but no error message is produced Channel Average If statistics collection is enabled for the indicated channel channel Stats on this query returns the average over the most recent n A D samples where n is set with channel Points Channel Current Forward Reverse AC off Temperature input channels only Selects the direction of the excitation current In AC mode the current direction is switched with each ADC reading and each measurement is the average of the two most recent readings thereby eliminating errors caused by thermal EMFs The excitation current can also be switched off entirely to control sensor self heating the sensor cannot be read while the excitation current is off CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 96 SRS Channel d dt On Off Input channels only Enables or disables the derivative filter If set to On the value of the channel is replaced with its rate of change expressed in units such as degrees second Watts second etc Since the derivative is normally somewhat noisy the lowpass filter should be enabled when the derivative filter is used Channels that have their derivative filter enabled can be used as inputs for PID feedback loops in which case the feedback maintains a constant rate of temperature change rather than a constant absolute temperature ChannelA Diff Channel B Input channels only Enables or disables the difference
267. verage of several ADC readings Errors attempting to set its value of an input channel results in a locked parameter error SRS CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 100 SRS Channel alarm submenu All channel alarm instructions can only be applied to input channels Issuing any of the following instructions for an output channel results in an assembly time unrecognized instruction error Channel alarm lag 0 A non zero lag prevents the alarm from triggering until the signal has continuously exceeded the alarm limits for the indicated number of seconds Channel alarm latch No Yes Selecting No makes the channel s alarm momentary Yes makes the alarm latching A momentary alarm only sounds while the input signal exceeds the alarm limits a latching alarm once triggered continues to sound until the status or mode is set to off Channel alarm min 0 0 Channel alarm max 0 0 These instructions set the alarm thresholds The alarm is triggered whenever the signal exceeds these values The thresholds are specified in the same units in which the channel value is displayed If the channel s units are changed the limits are not automatically updated Channel alarm mask Returns a 32 bit integer that indicates which bit in the Alarm Status Register this alarm sets whenever it is tripped for example a mask value of 1 indicates that bit 0 is set 2 indicates that bit 1 is set 4 indicates that bit 2
268. ves FET Q251 such that the output of U233 is equal to the output of the current control DAC U240 FET Q233 is needed so that the gate of Q251 can be driven with a high voltage up to 50V FET Q251 can dissipate up to 10 W of power If it is not kept sufficiently cool it may fail in the on position Therefore a temperature sensor U140 measures the temperature of the heatsink The sensor outputs a voltage of 1 mV F which is read by one of the microcontroller s ADC inputs The microcontroller requests increasing cooling from the system fan as the heatsink temperature rises above 35 C If the heatsink temperature exceeds 60 C the microcontroller causes an error message to appear on the CTC s front panel and disables the output A pair of automatically resetting fuses F221 F222 cuts off the output current if it exceeds 2 A The current passes through the user s heater which is connected to J200 A second sense resistor R208 is used to measure the return current If the return current differs from the output current by more than 0 25A the microcontroller requests that an error message be displayed on the CTC s front panel Voltage and current monitor a multiplexed 16 bit ADC U280 monitors the heater current the voltage across the heater and the return current The ADC has a range of 0 4V The heater current is monitored by measuring the voltage across the sense resistor which is 0 2V when no current is flowing and 4 0V when the ma
269. wer to a heater If the high limit is less than the low limit the low limit takes precedence Range Channel Range 50V 2A 50V 6A 50V 2A 20V 2A 20V 6A 20V 2A Auto Using this control the maximum heater voltage can be set to 50 or 20V and the maximum heater current can be set to 2 0 6 or 0 2 A For safety the voltage should ideally be set to 20V if the full 50V is not needed however doing so does not improve the performance of the output On the other hand selecting a smaller current range does reduce the output noise and improve the accuracy In the Auto setting the range is selected based on the heater resistance and the Hi Lmt value Units Channel Units W A V Determines whether the heater output is specified in W watts A amps or V volts The W setting generally works the best with resistive heaters since the temperature of such heaters is roughly a linear function of the power supplied to the heater If the output is connected to a fan or a thermoelectric cooler the A setting is preferable The default setting is W IO type Channel IOType Meas out Set out Each output channel has a DAC that produces the output and an ADC that measures it The IO type setting determines whether the value displayed on the CTC100 s screen is the one measured by the ADC Meas out or the one that was sent to the DAC Set out The measured output can differ from the set output if for
270. which the setpoint is constant Moderate tuning produces a very stable feedback loop that behaves reasonably in a wide variety of situations The figure below compares the system s behavior when we change the setpoint from 60 to 70 C after relay tuning with the aggressive moderate and conservative options In this case the conservative tuning produces the best response 15 9 10 o E I 5 75 o Aggressive Moderate o 5 70 5 Conservative a E 65 o e 0 1 2 3 4 5 Minutes However the results are much different if we look at how the system responds to a thermal disturbance The next figure shows how well the system recovers when we start blowing air over the heater with a fan The setpoint is a constant 60 C In this case aggressive tuning produces the best response 1 g o z o a 3 oO o T 2 Aggressive Moderate o Sa 180 o S t i A 59 Conservative 5 a 58 0 1 2 3 4 5 Minutes CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 36 The actual behavior of your system might vary significantly from the behavior shown in these figures In any event the feedback gains determined by the automatic tuning algorithms should generally be regarded as only a starting point In critical applications the gains normally need to be manually adjusted to achieve good feedback performance Using the automatic tuner SRS Start with a stable temperature Befor
271. ximum current for the selected range is flowing The analog I O card has four channels that can be used as DAC outputs or ADC inputs On card regulators produce 5 15 and 15V analog supply voltages A 4 channel DAC U202 produces four 0 5V outputs which are converted to 10V by U203A D Switches U204A D can disconnect any of the DAC outputs from the card s BNC connectors changing the affected channels from DAC outputs to ADC inputs The outputs of the four switches are connected to the card s four BNC connectors A self resetting fuse F301 4 temporarily shuts off the current if it exceeds 200 mA The normal resistance of the fuse is about 1 5 ohms D301 protects the card from electrostatic discharge and excessive voltages U206 multiplexes the four channels into a 24 bit ADC Since the ADC has a 0 5V range while the inputs are specified for a 10V range the input voltage is divided by 4 and offset by 2 5V CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Circuit Description 133 Digital I O card ASRS The microcontroller communicates with the analog section through an optoisolated SPI bus A two bit address SPI ADDO SPI_ADD1 provided to an address decoder U302 selects one of three chips on the bus an SPI to parallel adapter U340 the ADC or the DAC The SPI to parallel adapter controls the ADC s multiplexer and the direction input or output of each channel The ADC s BUSY signal which is high while the ADC is perform
272. y indicate that the output circuit has been damaged Unable to tune feedback because the heater is under range Unable to tune feedback because the heater is over range During step response tuning the heater output is increased by the amount shown in the Step Y button During relay tuning the heater output is increased and then decreased by half of the Step Y CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller Operation 38 value If the heater output is expected to exceed its maximum or minimum values an error message appears The message appears before the heater output is changed Suggestions for best tuning results While tuning use the Plot display to graph the heater output and the temperature on separate graphs Make sure that you can see the temperature begin to rise or fall after the heater output changes If tuning fails let the temperature stabilize and try increasing the step Y or lag before attempting to tune again You may also need to increase the lowpass filter time constant The temperature must be stable when tuning is started Either the feedback must be running and stabilized at the setpoint or the heater must be off and the temperature stabilized at the ambient temperature Set the lowpass filter on the input temperature channel to a value just below the expected response time of the system The step response tuner in particular requires adequate lowpass filtering to produce accurate results Make sure
273. y year systemtime ms 0 systemtime smh seconds minutes hours day month year The systemt ime instruction is similar to System Other Time and System Other Date except that it 1 allows both time and date to be set or queried with a single instruction 2 provides the time to the second instead of the minute and 3 supports several different formats Systemtime sets or reports the time and date in the same format as System Other Time and System Other Date i e Apr 7 2011 11 48 am Systemtime dmy sets the date in the format day month year or day month year SRS CTCI00 Programmable Temperature Controller Remote Programming 85 Systemtime hms sets the time in the format hours minutes seconds where hours is a value between 1 and 23 Systemtime mdy sets the date in the format month day year or month day year Systemtime ms sets the time as the number of milliseconds since midnight on January 1 1970 UTC Systemtime smh sets the time as six integers indicating the seconds minutes and hours since midnight the day of the month the number of the month and the year IEEE 488 2 Instructions The following instructions are intended for use with the GPIB interface but can be issued through any of the CTC100 s I O ports These instructions ignore the Verbose setting a query instruction always returns the value only while a set instruction always returns nothing They also do not take the Integer arguments ca
274. zes a buffer i e performs linear scaling such that all y values are between 0 and CTC100 Programmable Temperature Controller PC Applications 126 normAll plot n buffer buffer2 plotAll remove buffer removeAll removeGraph removeTrace traceColor rep rev buffer riseStats column buffer roundY Axis on off saveData buffer fileName savePlot fileName selectGraph 0 selectionWindow add remove buffer setDefaultBounds setMarks Pos Neg buffer setSize 500 350 showBuffers showMarks smooth buffer O sub buffer I buffer2 subx buffer 0 0 suba buffer subi buffer undo buffer wave buffer 1 buffer2 1 0 xLabel state yLabel text SRS normalizes all buffers add the current contents of n buffers to the plot clear plot then plot all currently existing buffers delete a buffer delete all buffers remove the currently selected graph remove a trace from the plot by plot color black red blue orange green or cyan replot the currently plotted buffers reflecting all changes made since the last plot revert to last saved version display rise statistics for a buffer column option defines columns if set to on automatically scaled y axes will be set to a round number of units off by default save a buffer as a text file save the current plot as a GIF in the current directory selects the indicated graph O first graph to be added second g

CTC100 manual - Stanford Research Systems

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents